slc500 RIO

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 189

AllenBradley

Remote I/O
Adapter Module
User
(Cat. No. 1747ASB)
Manual
Important User Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this
Information publication, those responsible for the application and use of this
control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps
have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all
performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws,
regulations, codes, and standards.

The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples


shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example.
Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any
particular installation, Allen-Bradley does not assume responsibility
or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use
based on the examples shown in this publication.

Allen-Bradley publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the


Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid-State Control
(available from your local Allen-Bradley office), describes some
important differences between solid-state equipment and
electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration
when applying products such as those described in this publication.

Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in


whole or in part, without written permission of Allen-Bradley
Company, Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, we use notes to make you aware of safety


considerations:

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices


or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or
! death, property damage, or economic loss.

Attention statements help you to:


• identify a hazard
• avoid the hazard
• recognize the consequences
Important: Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.

PLC, PLC-2, PLC-3, and PLC-5 are registered trademarks of the Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.
SLC, SLC 500, PLC-5/11, PLC-5/12, PLC-5/15, PLC-5/20, PLC-5/25, PLC-5/30, PLC-5/40, PLC-5/60, PLC5-250,
PanelView, and RediPANEL are trademarks of Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines, Incorporated.
Summary of Changes

Summary of Changes

The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since


the last printing.

To help you find new information and updated information in this


release of the manual, we have included change bars as shown to the
right of this paragraph.

New Information The table below lists sections that document new features and
additional information about existing features, and shows where to
find this new information.

For This New Information See Chapter


Compatible Modules 1
Grounding Guidelines Appendix B
Master Control Relays and EmergencyStop switches Appendix B

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Table of Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
Who Should Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
Contents of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
Common Techniques Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-5
AllenBradley Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
Local Product Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
Technical Product Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
Your Questions or Comments on this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6

Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . soc-i


New Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . soc-i

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1747ASB Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Remote I/O Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
How The Scanner Interacts With Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Scanner I/O Image Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Crossing Logical Rack Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Creating More Than One Logical Device by Crossing a Logical
Rack Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Transferring Data With RIO Discrete and Block Transfers . . . . . 1-7
RIO Discrete Transfer Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Physical and Logical RIO Link Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Extended Node Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Compatible RIO Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Compatible RIO Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Compatible Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1747ASB Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Status Display and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
RIO Link and Processor Restart Lockout Connector . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Door Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
SelfLocking Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Cable Tie Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Manufacturing Test Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
ii Table of Contents

Quick Start for Experienced Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


Required Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
SW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
SW1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
SW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Chassis Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Slot Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Addressing I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
2Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
2Slot Addressing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2Slot Addressing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
1Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
1Slot Addressing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
1Slot Addressing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
1/2Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
1/2Slot Addressing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
1/2Slot Addressing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
How I/O Module Images Are Mapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
How Discrete I/O Modules Are Mapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
How Specialty I/O Module Images Are Mapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
When Block Transfer Mode is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
When Discrete Mode is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
DIP Switch Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
DIP Switch SW1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Logical Rack Number (SW11 through 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Logical Group Number (SW17,8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
DIP Switch SW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Baud Rate (SW21,2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Primary/Complementary Chassis (SW23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Reserved (SW24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
ASB Module Image Size (SW25, 6, 7, 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Special Image and Chassis Size Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Not Enough 1747ASB Module Image to Map All of the
Available Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
1747ASB Image Size Exceeds Slot Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
One Slot of Pair is Present, and 1747ASB Module Image is
Available for Both Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Both Slots Of A Pair Are Available But There Is Only Enough
1747ASB Module Image Space Available For One Slot . . . . 4-15
Table of Contents iii

DIP Switch SW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15


Hold Last State (SW31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Processor Restart Lockout (SW32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Link Response Time (SW33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup (SW34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Addressing Mode (SW35,6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Specialty I/O Mode (SW37) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
I/O Module Keying (SW38) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Switch Setting Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
SW1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
SW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
SW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


European Union Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Installing the 1747ASB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Link Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Link Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Wiring a Processor Restart Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
I/O Module Addressing Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Using a PLC as a Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Using an SLC as a Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Octal Label Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Applying the Octal Filter Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Applying the Octal Door Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Octal Kit and I/O Module Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

StartUp and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


System StartUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Powerup and Initialization Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Check Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Communication Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Inhibit Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Remote Expansion Chassis Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Invalid RIO Link Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
RIO Discrete or Block Transfers To Empty or Nonexistent
Chassis Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
RIO Discrete Transfers To Block Transfer Chassis Slots . . . . . . 6-6
RIO Block Transfers To Discrete Chassis Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Invalid Length RIO Block Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Testing the 1747ASB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
iv Table of Contents

I/O Module Installation and Removal Under Power . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9


I/O Module Insertion into a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
I/O Module Removal from a Scanned Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
I/O Module Removal from an Unscanned Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Troubleshooting Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Contacting AllenBradley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Status Operating Codes.A for Normal Operating Conditions . . . . . 7-2
Error Operating Codes for Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
DIP Switch Configuration Mismatch Fault Codes - Codes 1 and 2 7-5
I/O Module Configuration Mismatch Fault Codes - Code 3 . . . . . 7-6
I/O Runtime Fault Codes - Code 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


Basic SLC 500 Example - Using an RIO Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
RIO Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
SLC Processor Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
1747ASB Module Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
1747ASB Module I/O Mapping Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
RIO Address Label Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Application Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
SLC 500 Example - Using an RIO Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
RIO Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
SLC Processor Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
1747ASB Module 1 Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
1747ASB Module 2 Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
1747ASB Module 1 I/O Mapping Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
1747ASB Module 2 I/O Mapping Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
RIO Address Label Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Application Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
PLC5 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
RIO Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
PLC Processor Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
1747ASB Module 1 Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
1747ASB Module 2 Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
1747ASB Module 1 I/O Mapping Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
1747ASB Module 2 I/O Mapping Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
RIO Address Label Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Application Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Table of Contents v

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Adapter Operating Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Network Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Baud Rate Determination of Maximum Cable Length and
Terminating Resistor Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Throughput Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Discrete Throughput Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Calculating Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Discrete I/O Throughput without Block Transfers Present . . . . . . A-4
RIO Scan Time Calculation (TRIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
1747ASB Module Backplane Scan Time (Tbp) . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Discrete I/O Throughput without Block Transfers
Present Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Discrete I/O Throughput with Block Transfers Present . . . . . . . . A-8
Discrete I/O Throughput with Block Transfers Present Example A-10
Block Transfer Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System . . . . . . B-1


Selecting Your SLC 500/1746 Control Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Example for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Chassis 1 Contains: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Chassis 2 Contains: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
SLC 500 System Installation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Typical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Selecting an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Spacing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Preventing Excessive Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Wiring Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Grounding Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Master Control Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
EmergencyStop Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Schematic (Using IEC Symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Common Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Loss of Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Input States on Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Other Types of Line Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Power Conditioning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
vi Table of Contents

Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16


Excessive Line Voltage Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Excessive Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Class I, Division 2 Applications (United States Only) . . . . . . . B-18
Output Contact Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Mounting Your Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
Mounting Modular Hardware Style Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
Leftside View (all chassis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
1746A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
1746A7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
1746A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
1746A13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Link Coupler (AIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Installing Your I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
Features of an SLC 500 I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
Definition of Sinking and Sourcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
Contact Output Circuits - ac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
Solid State dc I/O Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
Sourcing Device with Sinking Input Module Circuit . . . . . . . . . B-24
Sinking Device with Sourcing Input Module Circuit . . . . . . . . . B-24
Sinking Device with Sourcing Output Module Circuit . . . . . . . B-24
Sourcing Device with Sinking Output Module Circuit . . . . . . . B-25
Inserting I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
Removing I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Wiring the I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27
Using Removable Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28
Removing the RTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28
Installing the RTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
Calculating Heat Dissipation for Your Control System . . . . . . . . . . B-30
Module Heat Dissipation: Calculated Watts vs. Maximum Watts . B-30
Calculating the Power Supply Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31
Determining the Power Supply Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-33
Example Heat Dissipation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34

Differences Between the 1747ASB Module and the


1771ASB Series C Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Image Size Selection (page 4-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Hold Last State Operation (page 4-15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Remote Expansion Chassis (page 3-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Inserting and Removing I/O Modules Under Power (page 6-9) . . . . C-3
Starting Logical Group Number Selection (page 4-4) . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Specialty I/O Module Image Mapping and Control (page 3-13) . . . . C-3
DIP Switch Locations (chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
I/O Module Keying (page 4-21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Physical Slot Numbering (page 3-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Table of Contents vii

Status Indication (page 7-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5


Throughput (page A-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Inhibit Functionality (page 6-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

DIP Switch and Address Configuration Worksheets . . . . . D-1


DIP Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Preface

Preface

Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual.
This preface covers the following topics:
• who should use this manual
• the purpose of this manual
• terms and abbreviations
• conventions used in this manual
• Allen-Bradley support

Who Should Use this Manual Use this manual if you are responsible for designing, installing,
programming, or troubleshooting control systems that use
Allen-Bradley small logic controllers.

You should have a basic understanding of PLCR and SLC 500t


products. You should understand programmable controllers and be
able to interpret the ladder logic instructions required to control your
application. If you do not, contact your local Allen-Bradley
representative for information on available training courses before
using this product.

Purpose of this Manual This manual is a learning and reference guide for the remote I/O
adapter module. It describes the procedures you use to address,
configure, install, and operate the 1747-ASB remote I/O adapter
module.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


P–2 Preface

Contents of this Manual

Chapter Title Contents


Describes the purpose, background, and scope of
Preface this manual. Also specifies the audience for whom
this manual is intended.
Explains and illustrates the theory behind the
1747ASB module's operation. Covers hardware
1 Overview
and software features, compatible devices, and
setup.
Quick Start Serves as a Quick Start Guide for the 1747ASB
2
for Experienced Users module.
Gives a chassis overview, and explains slot
3 Addressing numbering, I/O module image mapping, 2slot,
1slot, and 1/2slot addressing.
Contains DIP switch information, and shows odd
4 Configuration
size chassis and image conditions.
Provides installation procedures and wiring
5 Installation and Wiring
guidelines.
Explains powerup and initialization sequences,
normal operation, communication exceptions,
6 Startup and Operation
remote expansion power loss, invalid RIO link
transfers, and testing the 1747ASB module.
Shows how to interpret and correct problems with
7 Troubleshooting
your 1747ASB module.
Examines both SLC 500 and PLC5/40t
applications using a 1747ASB module. Gives
8 Application Examples
examples of the ladder programming necessary to
achieve the described result.
Contains 1747ASB and RIO link specifications, as
Appendix A Specifications
well as throughput information.
Provides power supply specifications,
recommendations for safely installing your control
Understanding Your
system, instructions for mounting your control
Appendix B SLC 500/1746 Control
system and installing and wiring your I/O modules,
System
and ways to calculate heat dissipation for your
control system.
Differences Between the
Provides a pointbypoint comparison of the 1747
Appendix C 1747ASB and 1771ASB
and 1771 ASB modules.
Series C Modules
Contains worksheets for setting the 1747ASB
Appendix D Worksheets module's DIP switches and addressing remote I/O
modules with an SLC processor.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Preface P–3

Related Documentation

The following documents contain additional information concerning


Allen-Bradley SLCt and PLC products. To obtain a copy, contact
your local Allen-Bradley office or distributor.

Document
For Read This Document
Number
An overview of the SLC 500 family of products SLC 500 System Overview 17472.30
A description on how to install and use your Modular SLC 500 Installation & Operation Manual for Modular
17476.2
programmable controller Hardware Style Programmable Controllers
Information regarding the use of a 1747KE module as a
DH485/RS232C Interface Module User Manual 17476.12
communications interface
Information regarding the use of the 1747DCM as a remote I/O
Direct Communication Module User Manual 1747NM007
device
Information regarding the use of the 1747SN SLC RIO scanner RIO Scanner User Manual 17476.6
Information regarding the use of analog modules with the SLC 500
SLC 500 Analog I/O Modules User Manual 17466.4
system
Information regarding programming your BASIC module SLC 500 BASIC Language Reference 17466.3
Indepth information on grounding and wiring AllenBradley AllenBradley Programmable Controller Grounding
17704.1
programmable controllers and Wiring Guidelines
PLC5 Family Programmable Controllers Hardware
A description on how to install a PLC5r system 17856.6.1
Installation Manual
A description of important differences between solidstate
programmable controller products and hardwired Application Considerations for SolidState Controls SGI1.1
electromechanical devices
Published by the
National Fire
An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical
National Electrical Code Protection
equipment
Association of
Boston, MA.
A complete listing of current AllenBradley documentation,
including ordering instructions. Also indicates whether the AllenBradley Publication Index SD499
documents are available on CDROM or in multilanguages.
A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations AllenBradley Industrial Automation Glossary AG7.1

Terms and Abbreviations The following terms and abbreviations are specific to this product.
For a complete listing of Allen-Bradley terminology, refer to the
Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary, Publication Number
AG-7.1.

Adapter – Any physical device that is a slave on the RIO link.

Adapter Image – That portion of the scanner image assigned to an


individual adapter. You configure the adapter image by assigning it a
starting logical rack number, starting logical group number and the
number of logical groups it uses. In the case of the 1747-ASB
module, this is referred to as the 1747-ASB module image.

ASB Module – The Catalog Number 1747-ASB Remote I/O


Adapter Module. The 1747-ASB module is an adapter.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


P–4 Preface

ASB Module Chassis – The chassis directly controlled by the


1747-ASB module. This includes the remote chassis and (if
installed) two remote expansion chassis.

Discrete I/O Module – An I/O module used to sense or control


two-state (ON/OFF) devices.

Inhibit – A function by which the scanner stops communicating with


a logical device. The logical device will consider itself inhibited if it
does not receive communications from the scanner within a certain
period of time.

I/O Module – Any 1746 or 1747 I/O module that is supported by the
1747-ASB module.

Local Expansion Chassis – A chassis that is connected to a local


SLC chassis using a 1747-C9 (91.4 cm [36 in.]) or 1747-C7 (15.2 cm
[6 in.]) cable.

Local PLC Chassis – The 1771 chassis that contains a PLC


processor and scanner.

Local SLC Chassis – The chassis that contains the SLC processor
and scanner.

Logical Device – Any portion of a logical rack that is assigned to a


single adapter. Adapters may appear as more than one logical
device.

Logical Group – A logical group consists of one input and one


output word within a logical rack. A word consists of 16 bits, each
bit represents one terminal on a discrete I/O module.

Logical Rack – A fixed section of the scanner image comprised of


eight input words and eight output words.

Logical Slot – A logical slot consists of one input and one output
byte within a logical group. A byte consists of 8 bits, each bit
represents one terminal on a discrete I/O module.

PLC Chassis – A physical PLC rack that houses 1771 I/O modules
and PLC processors.

Remote Chassis – The chassis containing a 1747-ASB module and


connected to the local SLC or PLC chassis via the RIO link.

Remote Expansion Chassis – A chassis that is connected to a


remote chassis using a 1747-C9 (91.4 cm [36 in.]) or 1747-C7
(15.2 cm [6 in.]) cable.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Preface P–5

Reset, Adapter Decide – Commands sent by the scanner to a logical


device during an RIO discrete transfer. These commands instruct the
logical device to reset all of its discrete outputs if hold last state is
not selected, or to hold all of its discrete outputs in their last state if
hold last state is selected.

Reset, Adapter Reset – Commands sent by the scanner to a logical


device during an RIO discrete transfer. These commands instruct the
logical device to reset all of its discrete outputs regardless of the hold
last state selection.

RIO Block Transfer – The exchange of up to 64 words of data


between the scanner and adapter. RIO block transfers only occur if
you program them in your processor control program. The
1747-ASB module supports a block transfer of up to 8 words.

RIO Discrete Transfer – The exchange of image data between the


scanner and adapter. RIO discrete transfers occur continuously
whenever the scanner and adapter are communicating on the RIO
link.

RIO Link – An Allen-Bradley communication system supporting


high-speed serial transfer of Remote I/O (RIO) control information.
This link consists of one master one or more slaves.

Scanner – The communication master on the RIO link.

Scanner Image – The data table area within the scanner, used to
exchange I/O information between the scanner and all the adapters
on the RIO link. The scanner image is a portion of the SLC or PLC
processor image.

SLC Chassis – A physical SLC rack that houses SLC processors,


1746 and 1747 I/O modules.

Slot – The physical location in any chassis used to insert I/O


modules.

Specialty I/O Module – An I/O module other than a discrete I/O


module (e.g., an analog module).

Common Techniques Used in The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
this Manual • Bulleted lists such as this one provide information, not procedural
steps.
• Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical
information.
• Italic type is used for emphasis.
• Text in this font indicates words or phrases you should type.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


P–6 Preface

AllenBradley Support Allen-Bradley offers support services worldwide, with over 75


Sales/Support Offices, 512 authorized Distributors and 260
authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States
alone, plus Allen-Bradley representatives in every major country in
the world.

Local Product Support

Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative for:


• sales and order support
• product technical training
• warranty support
• support service agreements

Technical Product Assistance

If you need to contact Allen-Bradley for technical assistance, please


review the information in the Troubleshooting chapter first. Then
call your local Allen-Bradley representative.

Your Questions or Comments on this Manual

If you find a problem with this manual, please notify us of it on the


enclosed Publication Problem Report.

If you have any suggestions for how this manual could be made
more useful to you, please contact us at the address below:

Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.


Automation Group
Technical Communication, Dept. 602V, T122
P.O. Box 2086
Milwaukee, WI 53201-2086

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Chapter 1
Overview

This chapter presents:


• 1747-ASB module overview
• remote I/O overview
• compatible devices
• 1747-ASB module features
• setup and operational overview

1747ASB Module Overview The 1747-ASB module is an SLC 500 single-slot, RIO
communication link module. It occupies the first slot (slot 0) of a
1746 remote chassis, where the SLC processor normally resides.

The 1747-ASB module is an adapter, or slave, on the RIO link, and


the master of the remote chassis and remote expansion chassis it is
installed in. Remote expansion chassis are optional. It acts as a
gateway between the scanner and the I/O modules residing in the
remote chassis and remote expansion chassis. The 1747-ASB
module maps the image of the I/O modules in its remote chassis and
remote expansion chassis directly to the SLC or PLC processor
image.

Output data is sent from the scanner of either the SLC or PLC local
chassis to the 1747-ASB module across the RIO link. This data is
automatically transferred to the output modules across the chassis
backplane by the 1747-ASB module. Inputs from the input modules
are collected via the backplane by the 1747-ASB module and sent
back to the scanner across the RIO link. No user programming of
the 1747-ASB module is necessary.
1747ASB Module

Supervisory SLC (or PLC)

Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis

1747ASB module
RIO Link
Outputs to
Modules

Remote Chassis
Inputs from
Modules 1747ASB Module

Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


1–2 Overview

Remote I/O Overview To better understand the use of the 1747-ASB module, you should
have an understanding of the RIO link. The RIO link is an
Allen-Bradley communications system supporting high-speed
transfer of control information. An RIO link consists of a single
master device and one or more slave devices. The master device is
referred to as the scanner. The slave devices are referred to as
adapters (such as the 1747-ASB module).

RIO scanners and adapters work together to serially communicate


PLC or SLC processor data to remotely located I/O devices. PLC
and SLC processors exchange inputs and outputs with scanners.
Scanners exchange inputs and outputs with adapters located on the
RIO link. The adapter’s control is based on the adapter type.

How The Scanner Interacts With Adapters

The scanner’s function is to continuously scan the adapters on the


RIO link in a consecutive manner. The scan consists of one or more
RIO discrete transfers to each adapter on the RIO link.

RIO discrete transfers consist of the scanner sending output image


data and communication commands to the adapter that instruct the
adapter on how to control its output. (These include run, reset,
adapter reset, and reset decide commands.) The adapter responds by
sending input data to the scanner. The scanner performs as many
RIO discrete transfers as necessary to update the entire adapter
image. If RIO discrete transfers do not occur, data is not exchanged
between the scanner and adapter.

Important: RIO discrete transfers are asynchronous with the


processor scan.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Overview 1–3

1747ASB Module

Processor Scanner RIO Discrete


Transfers
with Adapter 1
Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis

SLC Local Chassis


RIO Discrete
Transfers
RIO Link with Adapter 2

PanelViewt Operator Terminal

1747ASB Module

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 3
Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 4
RediPANEL

1747ASB Module
Processor/Scanner

RIO Discrete
Transfers
PLC Local with Adapter 1
Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis
Chassis
RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 2
RIO Link

PanelView Operator Terminal


1747ASB Module

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 3
Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 4
RediPANEL

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


1–4 Overview

Scanner I/O Image Division

The scanner allows each adapter to use a fixed amount (user defined)
of the scanner’s input and output image. Part of the processor’s
image is used by local I/O, the other portion is used by the scanner
for remote I/O. For a PLC-5, logical rack 0 is dedicated for local
I/O.

The scanner’s remote I/O image is divided into logical racks and
further divided into logical groups. A full logical rack consists of
eight input and eight output image words. A logical group consists
of one input and one output word in a logical rack. Each logical
group is assigned a number from 0–7. The number of racks
available for remote I/O depends on the scanner you are using.

Local I/O

Logical Rack 0

Logical Rack 1
Remote I/O
(Scanner Image)
Logical Rack 2

Logical Group 0
Logical Rack 3
Logical Group 7
Processor I/O Scanner I/O Adapter
Image Image Image

The scanner image also contains the image of each adapter on the
RIO link. The adapter is assigned a portion of the scanner image,
which is referred to as the adapter image.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Overview 1–5

Crossing Logical Rack Boundaries

Adapter image size is expressed in an even number of groups. For


example, the 1747-ASB module image can be any size between 2
logical groups and 32 logical groups (4 logical racks), in 2 logical
group increments.

If the adapter’s image size is greater than 8 logical groups, the image
crosses logical rack boundaries. If an adapter’s image size is less
than 8 logical groups, it too can cross a logical rack boundary
depending upon the starting logical group number. The significance
of crossing logical rack boundaries is discussed in the next section.

Scanner Input or Output Image Scanner Input or Output Image


Bit Number (Octal) 17 10 7 0 Bit Number (Octal) 17 10 7 0
Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0 Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

Group 0 Group 0
Group 1 Group 1
Group 2 Group 2
Logical Group 3 Logical Group 3
Group 4 Group 4
Rack 0 Group 5 Adapter Rack 0 Group 5
Group 6 Image Group 6
Group 7 Group 7
Group 0 Group 0 Adapter
Group 1 Group 1 Image
Group 2 Group 2
Logical Group 3 Logical Group 3

Rack 1 Group 4
Group 5 Rack 1 Group 4
Group 5
Group 6 Group 6
Group 7 Group 7

Adapter image is 12 logical groups in size and Adapter image is 6 logical groups in size and crosses a logical
crosses a logical rack boundary due to its size. rack boundary due to its starting logical group number.

Important: Due to SLC and PLC addressing differences, when the


1747-ASB module is used with an SLC processor, the
image bit numbers are 0–7, 8–15 decimal. When the
1747-ASB module is used with a PLC processor, the
image bit numbers are 0–7, 10–17 octal. The I/O image
figures, like the two above, indicate the type of image
bit numbers used (octal, decimal, or both) throughout
this manual.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


1–6 Overview

Creating More Than One Logical Device by Crossing a Logical


Rack Boundary

RIO discrete transfers occur on a logical device basis, not an adapter


basis. A logical device is any portion of a logical rack that is
assigned to a single adapter.

When an adapter’s image is more than one logical device, the


scanner sees the single adapter as multiple adapters on the RIO link.
The scanner communicates with each logical device independently,
even if the logical devices are all assigned to one adapter. If an
adapter image is more than one logical device, the following is true:
Not all of the adapter image is updated by the scanner at the same
time. The number of logical devices determines the number of
RIO discrete transfers that are needed to update the entire adapter
image.
The adapter may receive different communication commands for
each logical device. In this case, the adapter decides which
command it responds to.

Scanner Input or Output Image


Bit Number (Octal) 17 10 7 0
Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2

In this example, two RIO Logical Group 3 Logical


Device
Rack 0
Group 4
discrete transfers are Group 5 Adapter
required for the scanner Group 6 Image
Group 7
to update the adapter Group 0
image containing two Group 1
logical devices. Group 2 Logical
Logical Group 3 Device

Rack 1 Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

To understand how an adapter’s logical devices are assigned, use


appendix D to determine the address configuration of your remote
I/O modules. You may then want to reassign certain adapters so
their images do not cross logical rack boundaries, allowing the
scanner to update their images in one RIO discrete transfer.

Important: The 1747-ASB module always functions as one adapter


on the RIO link, even though it may contain more than
one logical device. For example, the 1747-ASB module
does not begin normal operation until all of its logical
devices are receiving RIO discrete transfers from the
scanner.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Overview 1–7

Transferring Data With RIO Discrete and Block Transfers

Input and output image data and command information is quickly


exchanged between a scanner and adapter using RIO discrete
transfers. RIO discrete transfers are the simplest way a scanner and
adapter communicate with each other. RIO discrete transfers, which
are transparent to the user, consist of the scanner sending the output
image data to the adapter, and the adapter transmitting input data to
the scanner. Each RIO discrete transfer also contains scanner
commands for the adapter.

RIO block transfers are initiated by a special command from the


PLC processor, typically when large amounts of data must be
exchanged with one specialty I/O module. Block transfers use the
basic RIO discrete transfer mechanism of the RIO link. However,
the actual transfer of data occurs asynchronous to the discrete
transfers. It is possible for several discrete transfers to occur before
a block transfer is processed.

RIO Discrete Transfer Example


This example illustrates how additional discrete transfers are
required when an adapter image crosses logical rack boundaries. It
consists of one scanner and three adapters. Adapter 1 requires one
RIO discrete transfer from the scanner to update its entire image.
Adapter 2 requires two RIO discrete transfers to update its image.
Adapter 3 requires three RIO discrete transfers to update its image.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


1–8 Overview

Scanner Input or Output Image to scanner


1747-ASB Module

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Bit Number (Octal) 17 10 7 0
Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Group 0 Adapter 1 Configured As:
Group 1 Starting Logical Rack: 0
Adapter 1 ➀

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Group 2 Starting Logical Group: 0
Logical Logical Device 1 Group 3 Adapter Image Size: 6 logical groups
Rack 0 Group 4
Group 5
Adapter 2 Group 6
Group 7
Logical Device 1 Group 0
Group 1 ➁ Adapter 2 Configured As:
Starting Logical Rack: 0
Adapter 2 Group 2
Starting Logical Group: 6
Logical

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Logical Device 2
Group 3
Adapter Image Size: 8 logical groups
Rack 1 Group 4

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Group 5

Adapter 3
Group 6
Group 7
Logical Device 1

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Group 0
Group 1

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Group 2
Logical Adapter 3 Group 3
Adapter 3 Configured As:
Rack 2 Logical Device 2

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Group 4
Group 5
Starting Logical Rack: 1
Starting Logical Group: 6
Group 6

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Adapter Image Size: 18 logical groups
Group 7
Group 0 ➂

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Group 1
Group 2
Logical

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Adapter 3 Group 3
Rack 3 Logical Device 3
Group 4

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

➀ The scanner updates the adapter image in one RIO discrete transfer because the adapter image
is contained within one logical rack.
➁ The scanner updates the adapter image in two RIO discrete transfers because the adapter image
crosses a logical rack boundary making the adapter image appear as two logical devices.
➂ The scanner updates the adapter image in three RIO discrete transfers because the adapter
image crosses two logical rack boundaries making the adapter image appear as three logical
devices.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Overview 1–9

Physical and Logical RIO Link Specifications

The maximum number of adapters that your scanner can


communicate with is determined by the scanner and adapter’s
physical and logical specifications, as described below:

Physical Specifications are the maximum number of adapters that


can be connected to the scanner. For more information, see
Extended Node Capability below.

Logical Specifications for the scanner are the maximum number of


logical racks the scanner can address, how the logical racks can be
assigned, and whether the scanner can perform block transfers.

For adapters, logical specification refers to the maximum size of the


adapter’s RIO image.

Extended Node Capability


Both scanners and adapters can have extended node capability.
Extended node capability allows you to use an 82 Ohm termination
resistor at both ends of the RIO link for all baud rates. Extended
node capability also allows for up to 32 adapters to be placed on the
RIO link.

Extended node capability can only be used if the scanner and all
adapters on the RIO link have extended node capability. The
1747-ASB module has extended node capability.

The tables on pages 1–10 and 1–11 provide lists of compatible RIO
scanners and adapters.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


1–10 Overview

Compatible RIO Scanners The 1747-ASB module is compatible with all Allen-Bradley
scanners. Scanners that do not support RIO block transfers do not
work with all of the I/O modules supported by the 1747-ASB
module. For example, the Catalog Number 1747-SN Series A, RIO
Scanner does not work with a Catalog Number 1746-BAS, BASIC
module because the scanner does not support RIO block transfer.

Refer to the appropriate scanner manual for details concerning


physical and logical specifications.

Catalog
Description
Number
Sub I/O scanner for MiniPLC2R
1771SN➀
and PLC5 families
1772SD, Remote scanner/distribution
SD2➁➂ panel for PLC2 family
1775S4A, I/O scannerprogrammer interface
S4B, S5➃ module for PLC3R family
1775SR, Remote scanner/distribution
SR5➃ panel for PLC3/10 family
1785L11B➃ PLC5/11t (in scanner mode)
1785LT/x➃➄ PLC5/15t (in scanner mode)
1785L20B ➃ PLC5/20t (in scanner mode)
1785LT2➃➄ PLC5/25t (in scanner mode)
1785L30x➃ PLC5/30t (in scanner mode)
1785L40x➃ PLC5/40 (in scanner mode)
1785L60x➃ PLC5/60t (in scanner mode)
5250RS➃ Remote scanner for PLC5/250t
1747SN➃➅ SLC Remote I/O Scanner
6008SI➃ IBMR PC I/O Scanner Module
6008SV➃ VMEbus I/O Scanner Module
6008SQH1,
Qbus I/0 Scanner Module
SQH2
➀ Revision D or later.
➁ Rev. 3 or later.
➂ Extended node capability not available with Series A.
➃ Extended node capability.
➄ PLC5/15 Series B Revision H or later have partial rack addressing. Earlier versions are limited to
3 devices.
PLC5/25 Series A Revision D or later have partial rack addressing. Earlier versions are limited to
7 devices.
➅ Series A scanner does not have block transfer.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Overview 1–11

Compatible RIO Adapters The 1747-ASB module can physically reside on the RIO link with
any other adapter. The following table lists the adapters available for
use with an RIO link.

Catalog
Description
Number
1785LT/x➀➁ PLC5/15 (in adapter mode)
1785LT2➀➁ PLC5/25 (in adapter mode)
1785LT3➀➁ PLC5/12t (in adapter mode)
1785L30x➀➁ PLC5/30 (in adapter mode)
1785L40x➀➁ PLC5/40 (in adapter mode)
1785L60x➀➁ PLC5/60 (in adapter mode)
1771ASC Remote I/O Adapter Module
1771ASB➂➃ Remote I/O Adapter Module
1Slot I/O Chassis W/Integral
1771AM1➀
Power Supply and Adapter
2Slot I/O Chassis W/Integral
1771AM2➀
Power Supply and Adapter
Plant Floor Terminal Remote I/O
1784F30D➀
Expansion Module
1771RIO Remote I/O Interface Module
1771JAB➀ Single Point I/O Adapter Module
1771DCM Direct Communication Module
1778ASB➀ Remote I/O Adapter Module
1747DCM➀ Direct Communication Module
2706xxxx➀➄ DL40 Dataliner
2705xxx➀ RediPANEL
2711xx➀ PanelView Terminal
Remote I/O Adapter for 1336 AC
1336G2➀
Industrial Drives
Remote I/O Adapter for 1395 DC
1395NA➀
Industrial Drives
1747ASB➀ Remote I/O Adapter Module
➀ Extended node capability
➁ In adapter mode
➂ Series A, B, and C
➃ Extended node capability for Series B and C
➄ Must be Catalog Number 2706ExxxxxB1

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


1–12 Overview

Compatible Modules The 1747-ASB module supports all SLC 5/01 compatible I/O
modules (class 0 and 1). The following modules can be placed in the
remote chassis and remote expansion chassis:
• all discrete I/O modules
• all analog I/O modules
• BASIC Module, Catalog Number 1746-BAS (SLC 5/01 mode)
• IMC 110 Motion Control Module, Catalog Number 1746-HS
• Distributed I/O Scanner, Catalog Number 1747-DSN (SLC 5/01
mode)
• Direct Communication Module, Catalog Number 1747-DCM
• Thermocouple/mV Input Module, Catalog Number 1746-NT4
• RTD/Resistance Module, Catalog Number 1746-NR4
• RS-232/DH-485 Communication Interface Module, Catalog
Number 1747-KE

1747ASB Module Features The 1747-ASB module has the following features:
• communicates I/O data up to a maximum of 3040 meters
(10,000 feet)
• supports 57.6K, 115.2K, and 230.4K baud operation on the RIO
link
• supports any mix of 1746 discrete or analog I/O
• controls up to 30 slots using remote expansion chassis
• allows use of 2-slot, 1-slot, and 1/2-slot addressing
• allows for image sizes between 2 and 32 logical groups (user
selectable)
• incorporates enhanced operating status and troubleshooting
capability using three 7-segment displays
• provides non-volatile memory for convenient I/O module slot
keying
• provides discrete output module hold last state selection
• provides RIO link processor restart lockout selection
• incorporates extended node capability
• supports RIO block transfers and RIO discrete transfers for
analog and other specialty I/O modules
• supports complementary I/O on the RIO link

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Overview 1–13

Hardware Features

The 1747-ASB module’s hardware features are highlighted below.


Detailed installation, operation, and troubleshooting information is
contained in chapters 5, 6, and 7.

COMM LED FAULT LED DIP Switches


(Green) (Red)
ADAPTER

SW3

SW2

SW1
COMM FAULT

SERIAL NO.

CAT
N
O

N
O

N
O

SLC 500
REMOTE I/O ADAPTER MODULE
1

1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STATUS

Status Display
1
(MSB)

FRN

SER
LOGICAL 3
RACK
SW1

Door

 UL
5

(LSB)
6

Label Manufacturing Test Plug

CLASS 1, GROUPS A, B, C AND D, DIV. 2


LOGICAL
7

GROUP
8

LISTED IND. CONT. EQ.


FOR HAZ. LOC. A196
N
O

LINE 1
BAUD
1

RATE
SHLD
2

CURRENT REQUIREMENT: 375mA


INSTALL IN SLOT ZERO OF MODULAR CHASSIS ONLY
IMPORTANT:
PRI/COMP
3

LINE 2
SW2

RSV

SA 
4

NC (MSB)
5

IMAGE
6

IN SIZE
7

(LSB)

OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
CODE T3C
Î
8

RIO Link and RET

Processor
N
O

FAC 1M
Restart
Î
HLS
1

PRL
Lockout
2

RESP
3

MADE IN USA
Connector
LAST CHA
SW3

4
5

ADDR
MODE
6

SP MODE
7

KEY
8

1747-ASB

SelfLocking Tab
Cable Tie Slots

Status Display and LEDs

The Status Display provides alphanumeric status of the 1747-ASB


module and RIO link. When combined with the COMM and FAULT
LEDs, they are very effective troubleshooting tools.

DIP Switches

The 1747-ASB module’s three DIP switches allow you to configure


the following items:
• Starting Logical Rack Number (Logical Rack) – is the
1747-ASB module’s starting logical rack number in the scanner’s
image.
• Starting Logical Group Number (Logical Group) – is the
1747-ASB module’s starting logical group number within the
scanner’s image.
• Baud Rate (Baud Rate) – is the 1747-ASB module’s RIO link
communication rate. The baud rate must be the same for all
adapters on the RIO link.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


1–14 Overview

• Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis (PRI/COMP) –


determines whether the 1747-ASB module appears to the scanner
as a primary or complementary chassis.
• Adapter Image Size (IMAGE SIZE) – indicates the I/O image
size to be reserved for the adapter. It can be any size between 2
and 32 groups in two logical group increments.
• Hold Last State (HLS) – determines whether the discrete output
modules are held in their last state when:
– RIO link communication with the 1747-ASB module is
lost.
– The scanner inhibits the 1747-ASB module.
– The scanner sends Reset, Adapter Decide commands to the
1747-ASB module.
• Processor Restart Lockout (PRL) – determines whether the
1747-ASB module automatically resumes RIO link
communications if communication is lost and then restored.
• Link Response Time (RESP) – selects restricted or unrestricted
RIO link response time.
• Last Chassis/PLC-3 Backup (LAST CHA) – When the
1747-ASB module is used with a PLC-2 or PLC-5, this switch
indicates to the scanner that the 1747-ASB module is the last
adapter mapped into the 1747-ASB module’s highest logical rack.
When using a PLC-3 processor, the switch determines whether
the 1747-ASB module supports the PLC-3 backup function.
• Addressing Mode (ADDR MODE) – determines the 1747-ASB
module’s remote chassis and remote expansion chassis addressing
mode. 2-slot, 1-slot, and 1/2-slot is available.
• Specialty I/O Mode (SP MODE) – determines whether the
1747-ASB module discretely maps or block transfer maps
specialty I/O modules in its remote chassis and remote expansion
chassis.
• I/O Module Keying (KEY) – determines if the 1747-ASB
module saves its current I/O module and DIP switch
configuration to its non-volatile memory, or if the 1747-ASB
module compares the current I/O module and DIP switch
configuration to the one saved in its non-volatile memory.

RIO Link and Processor Restart Lockout Connector

The 6-pin male connector attaches the 1747-ASB module to the RIO
link and processor restart lockout device.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Overview 1–15

Door Label

The door label provides DIP switch and wiring information.

SelfLocking Tabs

Self-locking tabs secure the module in the rack. No tools are


necessary to install or remove a module.

Cable Tie Slots

Cable tie slots can be used to secure the wiring cable to the module.

Manufacturing Test Plug

This plug is for manufacturing purposes only.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Chapter 2
Quick Start
for Experienced Users

This chapter helps you to get started using the 1747-ASB module.
We base the procedures here on the assumption that you have an
understanding of PLC and SLC 500 products, as well as the RIO
link. You should understand electronic process control and be able
to interpret the ladder logic instructions required to generate the
electronic signals that control your application.

Because it is a start-up guide for experienced users, this chapter does


not contain detailed explanations about the procedures listed. It
does, however, reference other chapters in this book where you can
get more detailed information.

If you have any questions, or are unfamiliar with the terms used or
concepts presented in the procedural steps, always read the
referenced chapters before trying to apply the information.

This chapter:
• tells you what tools and equipment you need
• lists preliminary considerations
• describes when to address and configure the module
• explains how to install and wire the module
• discusses system power-up procedures

Required Tools and Have the following tools and equipment ready:
Equipment • medium blade screwdriver
• (2) 1/2 watt terminating resistors (See chapter 5, Installation and
Wiring, for correct size.)
• an adequate length of RIO communication cable (Belden 9463)
for your specific application (See chapter 5, Installation and
Wiring, for maximum cable distances.)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


2–2 Quick Start for Experienced Users

Procedures

1. Check the contents of shipping box. Reference

Unpack the shipping box making sure that the contents include:
• Remote I/O adapter module (Catalog Number 1747ASB)
• user manual (Publication 17476.13) -

If the contents are incomplete, call your local AllenBradley representative for assistance.

2. Ensure your chassis supports placement of the 1747ASB module. Reference

Check to see that your chassis supports placement of the adapter module by: Appendix A
• reviewing the power requirements of your system (The adapter consumes 600 mA @ 5VDC.) (Specifications)
• calculating the total load on the system power supply using the procedure described in appendix B
Appendix B
(Understanding
your
SLC 500/1746
Control System)

3. Choose the type of slot addressing you will use. Reference

Select 1747ASB addressing (i.e., 2slot, 1slot, or 1/2slot). A configuration worksheet is included in Chapter 3
appendix D to assist you in 1747ASB image table addressing. (Addressing)
Important: Due to SLC and PLC addressing differences, when the 1747ASB module is used with
an SLC processor, the image bit numbers are 0-7, 8-15 decimal. When the 1747ASB Appendix D
module is used with a PLC processor, the image bit numbers are 0-7, 10-17 octal. (DIP Switch and
Address
Configuration
Worksheets)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Quick Start for Experienced Users 2–3

4. Configure the module using the DIP switches. Reference

Set the DIP switches (located on the printed circuit board) to the desired setting. A worksheet is Chapter 4
included in appendix D to assist you in DIP switch configuration. (Configuration)

Appendix D
SW1 (DIP Switch and
Address
• Logical Rack Number Configuration
SW1 For details, see page 4–2.
Worksheets)
• Logical Group Number

N
O
Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB) 7 8 Group

1
Logical Rack Number Bit 4 ON ON 0 (default)
2
Logical Rack Number Bit 3
ON 3 4 5 6 7
Logical Rack Number Bit 2 ON OFF 2
OFF Logical Rack Number Bit 1 OFF ON 4
Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
OFF OFF 6
Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)
8

SW2
• Baud Rate
SW2 1 2 Baud Rate
ON ON 57.6K (default)
ON OFF 115.2K
N
O

Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB)


1

Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB)


OFF ON 230.4K
2

Primary/Complementary Chassis OFF OFF INVALID


3 4 5 6 7

ON Reserved
ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB) • Primary/Complementary Chassis
OFF ASB Module Image Size Bit 2 ON = Primary
ASB Module Image Size Bit 1
ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB) OFF = Complementary (default)
8

• 1747-ASB Module Image Size


For details, see page 4–9.

SW3
• Hold Last State
SW3 ON = Hold Last State
OFF = Do Not Hold Last State (default)
N
O

Hold Last State • Processor Restart Lockout


1

Processor Restart Lockout ON = Automatic Restart (default)


2

Link Response
ON OFF = Processor Lockout
3 4 5 6 7

Last Chassis/PLC-3 Backup


OFF Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB)
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB) • Link Response
Specialty I/O Mode ON = Restricted (default)
I/O Module Keying
OFF = Unrestricted
8

• Last Chassis
ON = Not Last Chassis (default)
OFF = Last Chassis
• Addressing Mode
5 6 Address
ON ON Invalid
ON OFF 1-slot Addressing (default)
OFF ON 1/2-slot Addressing
OFF OFF 2-slot Addressing
• Specialty I/O Mode
ON = Discrete (default)
OFF = Block Transfer
• I/O Module Keying
ON = Save Mode (default)
OFF = Check Mode

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


2–4 Quick Start for Experienced Users

5. Insert the 1747ASB module into the chassis. Reference

Chapter 5
ATTENTION: Never insert, remove, or wire modules (Installation and
with power applied to the chassis or devices wired to Wiring)
! the module.

Make sure system power is off; then insert the adapter module into slot 0 of your 1746 chassis.

Module Release
Card Guide

6. Connect all RIO link devices. Reference

Ensure that you: Chapter 5


• Daisy chain each RIO link device. (Installation and
• Ground the shield drain wire to the nearest chassis mounting bolt. Wiring)
• Connect the appropriate termination resistors on each end of the link.
Important: Do not connect anything to the NC (No Connect) terminal.

7. (Optional) Wire a processor restart lockout switch. Reference

Chapter 5
ATTENTION: Cycling power on any 1747ASB (Installation and
module chassis removes the processor restart lockout Wiring)
! condition (SW32) by reinitializing the 1747ASB
module.

Use a momentary switch (Class 1, Division 2) to short terminals IN and RET together.
Important: Do not connect anything to the NC (No Connect) terminal.

Momentary Switch LINE 1 (Blue wire)


SHLD (Shield wire)
LINE 2 (Clear wire)
NC (No Connect)
IN
RET
14 - 24 gauge wire
(maximum 5 feet)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Quick Start for Experienced Users 2–5

8. Attach the appropriate I/O Module Addressing Labels. Reference

Attach the Remote PLC or Remote SLC label to the outside bottom of each I/O module in your Chapter 5
1747ASB chassis, as shown below. Fill out each label completely. (Installation and
Wiring)

Chapter 8
INPUT INPUT (Application
Examples)

0-7 10 - 17 0-7 8 - 15
Rack Group(s) SN Slot
I:
SN Word(s)
O:
BT Discrete BT Discrete
Remote PLC System Remote SLC System

Remote PLC Label Remote SLC Label

0-7 10 - 17 0-7 8 - 15
Rack Group(s) SN Slot
I: SN Word(s)
O:
BT Discrete
BT Discrete
Remote PLC System Remote SLC System

9. If using a PLC processor as a master, attach the octal labels. Reference

The octal filter and door labels must be used when working with a PLC processor as a master. Chapter 5
A list of I/O modules that include an octal label kit can be found on pageNO TAG. (Installation and
Adhere the octal labels over the existing decimal labels, as shown below. Wiring)

Decimal Filter Label Octal Filter Label


INPUT

OCTAL

Octal Door Label

1746-XXXX 1746-XXXX (OCTAL)

Decimal Door Label

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


2–6 Quick Start for Experienced Users

10. Go through the system startup procedure. Reference

Chapter 6
ATTENTION: Never insert, remove, or wire modules (StartUp and
with power applied to the chassis or devices wired to Operation)
! the module.

Follow the steps below:


1. Cycle power one last time in save mode (SW38 ON).
2. Remove power from the system.
3. Remove the 1747ASB module and set SW38 to the OFF position (check mode).
4. Replace the 1747ASB module in slot 0.
5. Apply power to your system.

11. Check that the module is operating correctly. Reference

During normal operation (PLC or SLC in Run mode), the 1747ASB module appears as shown Chapter 6
below: (StartUp and
Operation)

Chapter 7
ADAPTER (Troubleshooting)
COMM FAULT

Green COMM
LED is on. Red FAULT
LED is off.
STATUS
Status display
indicates a run
condition.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Chapter 3
Addressing

This chapter presents:


• slot numbering
• 2-slot, 1-slot, and 1/2-slot addressing
• how I/O module images are mapped

Chassis Overview The 1747-ASB module controls 1 remote chassis and up to 2 remote
expansion chassis with a maximum of 30 slots. Currently, there are
four different types of chassis available.

4Slot 7Slot

Catalog Number 1746A4 Catalog Number 1746A7

10Slot 13Slot

Catalog Number 1746A10 Catalog Number 1746A13

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


3–2 Addressing

The first chassis is referred to as the remote chassis. Up to two


additional chassis, referred to as remote expansion chassis, can be
connected to the remote chassis using a:
• 6 inch cable, Catalog Number 1746-C7
• 36 inch cable, Catalog Number 1746-C9
Each remote chassis and remote expansion chassis requires its own
power supply, such as Catalog Numbers 1746-P1, -P2, or -P3.

Important: A 1747-ASB module fault occurs if the remote


expansion chassis are not powered.
Catalog Number 1746C9

36 inch cable

Catalog Number 1746P1


Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis
Catalog Number 1746P3

Catalog Number 1746C7

6 inch
cable
Catalog Number 1746P2
Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis
Catalog Number 1746P2

Slot Numbering The 1747-ASB module is capable of controlling 30 slots. When


expansion chassis are used, the 1747-ASB module treats all of the
I/O modules as if they are installed in a single chassis.

The remote chassis and remote expansion chassis slots are numbered
from 0–30. The 1747-ASB module must reside in slot 0. Slots
numbered 31 and above cannot be used.

Important: Installing modules in slots 31 and above causes a


1747-ASB module error.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 not not
used used

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Addressing 3–3

Addressing I/O Modules SLC and PLC processors address the I/O modules residing in the
1747-ASB module chassis by logical rack and logical group. Before
using the 1747-ASB module, you should first understand slot
addressing and how each module’s image is mapped into the
1747-ASB module’s image.

Slot addressing refers to how each chassis slot is assigned a specific


amount of the 1747-ASB module image. The amount depends on
which type of slot addressing you choose; 2-slot, 1-slot, and 1/2-slot
addressing is available, as shown below:

Important: Due to SLC and PLC addressing differences, when the


1747-ASB module is used with an SLC processor, the
image bit numbers are 0–7, 8–15 decimal. When the
1747-ASB module is used with a PLC processor, the
image bit numbers are 0–7, 10–17 octal.

2Slot
Addressing Two slots are addressed as one logical group.

Input Image Output Image

Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 1

1Slot
Addressing One slot is addressed as one logical group.

Input Image Output Image

Slot 1 Slot 1

1/2Slot
Addressing One slot is addressed as two logical groups.

Input Image Output Image

Slot 1 Slot 1

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


3–4 Addressing

2Slot Addressing

When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 2-slot addressing, the


processor addresses two chassis slots as one logical group. Each
slot, beginning with slot 1, is sequentially assigned one byte (8 bits)
of the 1747-ASB module’s input and output image. Each terminal
on a discrete I/O module installed in a slot is assigned a bit within
the byte, beginning with the least significant bit. 2-slot addressing is
designed to accommodate I/O modules whose image size is one byte
or less.

Slot 1 is assigned to the low byte of the first logical


group of the 1747ASB module's image, beginning
Slot 1 with bit 0 (the LSB).

Input Image Output Image

17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
group 0 group 0

Slot 1 Slot 1

Each terminal is assigned a bit, Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit. beginning with the least significant bit.

Slot 2 is assigned to the high byte of the first


logical group of the 1747ASB module's
Slot 2 image, beginning with bit 8 decimal, 10 octal.

Input Image Output Image


17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
group 0 group 0

Slot 2 Slot 2

Each terminal is assigned a bit, Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit. beginning with the least significant bit.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Addressing 3–5

To accommodate modules that require up to one word (16 bits) of


input and/or output image, the 1747-ASB module pairs slots
beginning with slot 1 (i.e., slot 1 is paired to slot 2, etc.). Slot
pairing combines the low and high byte into a one word input and
output image. This maximizes I/O image space, allowing you to
install an input module in one slot and an output module in the other,
each using up to 16 bits of the paired input and output images.
I
O When a module is installed in slot 1 that requires one word of
input image, slot 1 uses the input image normally assigned to
slots 1 and 2. Slot 2, therefore, cannot use any of its input
image. However, slot 2 can now use the output image
Slot 1 normally assigned to slots 1 and 2, because slot 1 is not
Paired using its portion of the output image.

Input Image
17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
Group 0
I = Input Module
Slot Pair Slot 1 Slot 1
O = Output Module
I When a module is installed in slot 2 that requires one word of
O
output image, slot 2 uses the output image normally
assigned to slots 1 and 2 (if slot 1 is not already using it).
The lesser slot number has priority over the greater.
Slot 2
Paired

Output Image
17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
Group 0
Slot 2 Slot 2

2Slot Addressing Considerations


When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 2-slot addressing, you
can use 4, 8, 16 point, combination, and specialty I/O modules.

If it is necessary to use 16 point modules, like modules (i.e., two


input modules) cannot be installed as a pair. This is because each 16
point module uses a full word in the image. For this reason you must
pair an input with an output module. 32 point modules cannot be
used.

If the discrete mode is selected, specialty I/O modules with one word
or less of input and output image are discretely mapped such as the
1747-KE. Specialty I/O modules with two or more words of input or
output image are block transfer mapped.

If block transfer mode is selected, all specialty I/O modules are block
transfer mapped regardless of their image size.

The 1747-ASB module can block transfer map a maximum of eight


words.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


3–6 Addressing

2Slot Addressing Examples


The following example illustrates how to map modules requiring:
• one byte or less of input or output image
• one word of input or output image
I = Input Module I I I I I I I I I
O O O O O O O O O
O = Output Module

1746 Slot Numbering 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Slot Pair 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1747ASB Input Image 1747ASB Output Image


17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal

Modules Requiring One Byte 15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal

Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot Pair 1


In this example, the modules require one byte of input Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot Pair 2
or output image.
Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot Pair 3
Input modules do not have to be paired with output Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot Pair 4
modules because, in the example to the right, only one Slot 10 Slot 9 Slot 10 Slot 9 Slot Pair 5
byte of input or output image is required.
Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot Pair 6
To use image space more efficiently, slot pairing can be Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot Pair 7
used with 16 point I/O module as shown below or Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot Pair 8
complementary I/O can be used. Refer to page 4-5. Slot 17
Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slot Pair 9

= unused

1747ASB Input Image 1747ASB Output Image


17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal
Modules Requiring One Word
Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot Pair 1
In this example, the modules require one word of input Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot Pair 2
or output image.
Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot Pair 3
Input modules must be paired with output modules to Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot Pair 4
ensure the paired modules do not use the same image Slot 9 Slot 9 Slot 10 Slot 10 Slot Pair 5
locations.
Slot 11 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot Pair 6
Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 14 Slot 14 Slot Pair 7
Slot 15 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 16 Slot Pair 8

Slot 17 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slot 18 Slot Pair 9

If images overlap, a 1747-ASB module error occurs. For example, if


16 point input modules are installed in slots 1 and 2, their input
images overlap and a 1747-ASB module error occurs.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Addressing 3–7

1Slot Addressing

When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 1-slot addressing, the


processor addresses one chassis slot as one logical group. Each slot,
beginning with slot one, is sequentially assigned one word (16 bits)
of the 1747-ASB module’s input and output image. Each terminal
on the I/O module is assigned a bit within the word, beginning with
the least significant bit. 1-slot addressing is primarily designed to
accommodate I/O modules whose image size is less than or equal to
one word but more than one byte.

Slot 1 is assigned to the first logical group of the 1747ASB


Slot 1 module's image, beginning with bit 0 (the LSB).

Input Image Output Image


17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
group 0 group 0

Slot 1 Slot 1

Each terminal is assigned a bit, Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit. beginning with the least significant bit.

Slot 2 is assigned the next logical group of the 1747ASB


Slot 2 module's image, beginning with bit 0 (the LSB).

Input Image Output Image


17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
group 1 group 1

Slot 2 Slot 2

Each terminal is assigned a bit, Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit. beginning with the least significant bit.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


3–8 Addressing

To accommodate modules that require up to two words (32 bits) of


input and/or output image, the 1747-ASB module pairs slots
beginning with slot 1 (i.e., slot 1 paired to slot 2, etc.). Slot pairing
combines both words (of either the input or output image, whichever
is required) and assigns them to one slot. This maximizes I/O image
space, allowing you to install an input module in one slot and an
output module in the other, each using up to 32 bits of the paired
input and output images.
I When a module is installed in slot 1 that requires both
O
words of input image, slot 1 uses the input image normally
assigned to slot 2. Slot 2, therefore, cannot use any of its
input image. However, slot 2 can now use the output
Slot 1 image normally assigned to slot 1, because slot 1 is not
Paired using it.
Input Image
17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
Group 0
Slot 1
Group 1

I = Input Module
Slot Pair
O = Output Module

I
O
When a module is installed in slot 2 that requires both
words of output image, slot 2 uses the output image
normally assigned to slot 1 (if slot 1 is not already using
Slot 2 it). The lesser slot number has priority over the greater.
Paired
Output Image
17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
Group 0
Slot 2
Group 1

1Slot Addressing Considerations


When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 1-slot addressing, you
can use 4, 8, 16 point, 32 point discrete and discrete combination,
discrete and block transfer specialty I/O modules.

Like 32 point modules (i.e., two input modules) cannot be installed


as a pair because both slots cannot use the same image location. For
example, if you use a 32 point input module that requires two words
of the image, the other module within the pair must be an output
module.

If the discrete mode is selected, specialty I/O modules with two


words or less of input and output image are discretely mapped such
as the 1746-NIO4I. However, with a combination specialty module
such as the 1746-NIO4I, the adjacent slot must be empty. Specialty
I/O modules with more than two words of input or output image are
block transfer mapped such as the 1746-NI4, -NO4I, -NO4V, and
-HS.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Addressing 3–9

If the block transfer mode is selected, all specialty I/O modules are
block transfer mapped regardless of their image size.

The 1747-ASB module can block transfer map a maximum of eight


words.

1Slot Addressing Examples


The following example illustrates how to map modules requiring:
• one word of input or output image
• more than one word of input or output image

I I I I I I I I I
I = Input Module O O O O O O O O O
O = Output Module

1746 Slot Numbering 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Slot Pair 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Modules Requiring One Word Modules Requiring More Than One Word
In the example below, the modules require one word of input or output image. In the example below, the modules require more than one word of input
or output image.
Input modules do not have to be paired with output modules, because, in this
example, only one word of input and output image is required. Input modules must be paired with output modules so their input and
output images do not overlap.
To reduce unused image space, slot pairing can be used with 32 point I/O
modules or the system can be configured for complementary I/O. For more
information, refer to the complementary I/O description found on page 4-5.

1747ASB Input Image 1747ASB Output Image 1747ASB Input Image 1747ASB Output Image
17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal

Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 2


1 1 1 1
Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 2
Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 4
2 2 2 2
Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 4
Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 6
3 3 3 3
Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 6
Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 4 Slot 8 Slot 8 4
4 4
Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 8
Slot 9 Slot 9 Slot 9 Slot 9 Slot 9 Slot 9 Slot 10 Slot 10
5 Slot Pair 5 Slot Pair 5 Slot Pair 5 Slot Pair
Slot 10 Slot 10 Slot 10 Slot 10 Slot 9 Slot 9 Slot 10 Slot 10
Slot 11 Slot 11 Slot 11 Slot 11 Slot 11 Slot 11 6 Slot 12 Slot 12 6
6 6
Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 12
Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 14 Slot 14
7 7 7 7
Slot 14 Slot 14 Slot 14 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 14 Slot 14
Slot 15 Slot 15 Slot 15 Slot 15 Slot 15 Slot 15 8 Slot 16 Slot 16 8
8 8
Slot 16 Slot 16 Slot 16 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 16
Slot 17 Slot 17 Slot 17 Slot 17 Slot 17 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slot 18
9 9 9 9
Slot 18 Slot 18 Slot 18 Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slot 18

= unused

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


3–10 Addressing

If images overlap, a 1747-ASB module error occurs. For example, if


32 point input modules are installed in slots 1 and 2, their input
images overlap and a 1747-ASB module error occurs.

1/2Slot Addressing

When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 1/2-slot addressing,


the processor addresses one chassis slot as two logical groups. Each
slot, beginning with slot one, is sequentially assigned two words (32
bits) of the 1747-ASB module’s input and output image. Each
terminal on the I/O module is assigned a bit within the word,
beginning with the least significant bit. 1/2 addressing is designed to
accommodate I/O modules whose image size is less than or equal to
two words but more than one word.

Slot 1 Slot 1 is assigned to the first two logical groups of the


1747ASB module's image, beginning with bit 0 (the LSB).

Input Image Output Image


17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
group 0 Group 0
Slot 1 Slot 1
group 1 Group 1
Each terminal is assigned a bit, Each terminal is assigned a bit,
beginning with the least significant bit. beginning with the least significant bit.

Slot 2 Slot 2 is assigned to the next two logical groups of the


1747ASB module's image, beginning with bit 0 (the LSB).

Input Image Output Image


17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
group 2 Group 2
Slot 2 Slot 2
group 3 Group 3

Each terminal is assigned a bit, Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit. beginning with the least significant bit.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Addressing 3–11

To accommodate modules that require up to four words of input


and/or output image, the 1747-ASB module pairs slots beginning
with slot one (i.e., slot 1 is paired to slot 2, etc.). Slot pairing
combines the two words assigned to each slot (of either the input or
output image, whichever is required) and assigns all four words to
one slot. This maximizes I/O image space, allowing you to install an
input module in one slot and an output module in the other, each
using up to four words of the paired input and output images.

I With slot pairing, when a module is installed in slot 1 that requires all four
O words of the input image, slot 1 uses the input image normally assigned to
slot 2. Slot 2, therefore, cannot use any of its input image. However, slot 2
can now use the output image normally assigned to slot 1, because slot 1
is not using it.
Slot 1
Paired Input Image
17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
Group 0
Group 1
Slot 1 Group 2

Group 3
I = Input Module
Slot Pair
O = Output Module

I
O
When a module is installed in slot 2 that requires all four words of the output
image, slot 2 uses the output image normally assigned to slot 1 (if slot 1 is
not already using it). The lesser slot number has priority over the greater.
Slot 2
Paired Output Image
17 10 7 0 Octal
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal
Group 0
Group 1
Slot 2 Group 2

Group 3

1/2Slot Addressing Considerations


When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 1/2-slot addressing,
you can use 4, 8, 16, 32 point, discrete combination and specialty I/O
modules in any slot.

If the discrete mode is selected, specialty modules with four words or


less of input or output image are discretely mapped such as the
1746-NI4, -NO4I, -NO4V, and -HS. However, with a specialty
module such as the 1746-HS, the adjacent slot must be empty.
Specialty modules with more than four words of input or output
image are block transfer mapped such as the 1746-BAS.

If the block transfer mode is selected, all specialty modules are block
transfer mapped regardless of the image size.

The 1747-ASB module can block transfer map a maximum of eight


words.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


3–12 Addressing

1/2Slot Addressing Examples


The following example illustrates how to map modules requiring:
• two words of input or output image
• more than two words of input or output image
I I I I
O O O O I = Input Module
O = Output Module

1746 Slot Numbering 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Slot Pair 1 2 3 4

Modules Requiring Two Words Modules Requiring More Than Two Words
In the example below, the modules require two words of input or output In this example, the modules require more than two words of input or output
image. image.
If you would like to know how you can use the unused input or output Input modules must be paired with output modules so their input or output
images, refer to the complementary I/O description, found on page 4-5. images do not overlap.

1747ASB Input Image 1747ASB Output Image 1747ASB Input Image 1747ASB Output Image
17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal

Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 2


Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 2
1 1 1 1
Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 2
Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 2
Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 4
Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 4
2 2 2 2
Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 4
Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 4
Slot Pair Slot Pair Slot Pair Slot Pair
Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 6
Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 6
3 3 3 3
Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 6
Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 6
Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 8
Slot 7 Slot 7 4 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 4 Slot 8 Slot 8
4 4
Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 8
Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 8

= unused

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Addressing 3–13

How I/O Module Images Are The method of transferring an I/O module’s image to the 1747-ASB
Mapped module’s image is referred to as image mapping, or mapping. An
I/O image can be discretely mapped or block transfer mapped. How
the module’s image is mapped depends on the type of module you
are using (discrete or specialty I/O).

The following table lists all of the different types of I/O modules
currently supported by the 1747-ASB module.

I/O Module Type of Module


4 point discrete I/O Discrete
8 point discrete I/O Discrete
16 point discrete I/O Discrete
32 point discrete I/O Discrete
Combination discrete I/O Discrete
Analog I/O Specialty
BASIC Module Specialty
IMC 110 Servo Motion Control Module Specialty
Distributed I/O Scanner Module Specialty
Direct Communications Module Specialty
KE Communications Module Specialty
Thermocouple/mV Module Specialty
RTD/Resistance Module Specialty
Stepper Controller Module Specialty

How Discrete I/O Modules Are Mapped

Discrete I/O images are exchanged with either the SLC or PLC
scanner using RIO discrete transfers. Discrete I/O module images
are always discretely mapped to the 1747-ASB module image.
Discrete I/O images are mapped into the assigned image space
beginning with the least significant bit. The example below assumes
1-slot addressing starting at logical group zero.

Backplane transfer from a


Processor/Scanner 4 point discrete input module to
the 1747ASB module image.
RIO discrete
transfer from the
1747ASB
module image to
PLC Local Chassis the scanner
image.

1
1747ASB Module Input Image
2 3 4 5 6
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
slot 1 group 0
Processor
slot 2 group 1

slot 3 group 2

slot 4 group 3
SLC Local Chassis
slot 5 group 4

slot 6 0 1 1 0 group 5

Scanner 4 Point Input


Module Data

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


3–14 Addressing

How Specialty I/O Module Images Are Mapped

Specialty I/O module images are discretely mapped or block transfer


mapped, depending on the specialty I/O mode you have selected for
the 1747-ASB module. SW3-7 provides two specialty I/O modes,
discrete and block transfer.

When Block Transfer Mode is Selected


The advantage of using block transfer mode is that it only requires
one byte of the 1747-ASB module’s input and output image.
However, you must add block transfer instructions to your PLC user
program, and block transfer times are generally longer than discrete
transfer times.

When block transfer mode is selected, all specialty modules that are
block transfer mapped use one byte in the 1747-ASB module’s input
and output image. These bytes reside in the least significant byte of
the 1747-ASB image reserved for the module’s slot.

When a module is block transfer mapped, the module’s input and


output image is transferred on the RIO link using RIO block
transfers. RIO block transfers are processed by the scanner and
1747-ASB module. The 1747-ASB module transfers the specialty
I/O modules image by way of a backplane scan. The 1747-ASB
module then transfers the image to the scanner using RIO block
transfers.

The scanner and 1747-ASB module process a maximum of one RIO


block transfer per logical device per RIO scan. If you wish to
perform four RIO block transfers for a logical device, at least four
RIO scans are required to complete these RIO block transfers.

The 1747-ASB module can block transfer up to a maximum of 8


words per block transfer.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Addressing 3–15

1747ASB module exchanges data with


the speciality I/O module via the
backplane.

The PLC scanner and


PLC Local Chassis
1747ASB module
exchange 1747ASB module is
the specialty I/O module's configured for 1slot
data using RIO block addressing.
transfers.
1 2 3 4 5 6

Processor/Scanner 1747ASB Module Input Image 1747ASB Module Output Image


15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
slot 1
slot 1
slot 2
slot 2
slot 3
slot 3
slot 4
slot 4
slot 5
slot 5
slot 6
slot 6

Block Transfer Byte


Block Transfer Byte
The byte reserved in the
1747ASB module's output and
input image is used by the
scanner and 1747ASB module to
process the RIO block transfer.

The 1747-ASB module processes RIO block transfers that are less
than or equal to the specialty I/O module’s image size. For
example, if a four word specialty I/O module is block transfer
mapped, the 1747-ASB module accepts RIO block transfer reads for
this module if they are less than or equal to four words. RIO block
transfers always begin reading or writing word 0 (least significant
word) of the module’s image.

An RIO block transfer size of zero will cause all of the module’s
image to be transferred.

When Discrete Mode is Selected


The advantage of discrete mode is that no programming is required
for data transfer. However, discrete mode requires more 1747-ASB
module image space than block transfer mode.

When discrete mode is selected, specialty I/O modules are discretely


mapped or block transfer mapped, depending on:
• the specialty I/O module’s image size
• the addressing mode selected (2-slot, 1-slot, or 1/2-slot)
When discrete mode is selected, a specialty I/O module is discretely
mapped if its image fits into the image space assigned to its slot pair.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


3–16 Addressing

For example, if the specialty I/O module such as the 1746-NIO4I and
-NIO4V requires two words of input and output image, and the
1747-ASB module is configured for 1-slot addressing, the specialty
I/O module is discretely mapped . However, if four words of input
or output image are required, the specialty I/O module such as the
1746-NI4, -NO4V, -NO4I, and -HS, are block transfer mapped.

RIO Discrete Mapping


Two words of input and output image
are required by the specialty I/O
module. The 1747ASB module is
configured for 1slot addressing, which
provides two words of input and output
image per slot pair. Because the
specialty I/O module's image can be
mapped into the provided image, the
specialty I/O module is discretely Two words required
mapped. The other slot of the pair is by specialty I/O module.
empty since all of the input and output Two words provided by
image is used. 1747ASB module.

RIO Block Transfer Mapping


Four words of input and output image
are required by the specialty I/O module.
The 1747ASB module is configured for
1slot addressing, which provides two
words of input and output image per slot
pair. Because the specialty I/O module's
image cannot be mapped into the
provided image, the specialty I/O module
is block transfer mapped.

Two words provided by Four words required


1747ASB module. by specialty I/O module.

Due to the module’s image size, some specialty I/O modules are
always block transfer mapped.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Addressing 3–17

The following table provides the specialty I/O module mapping used
when discrete mode is selected.

Max. Specialty I/O Specialty I/O I/O Module


Addressing Mode
Module Image Size Module Mapping Examples
2slot Discrete
1 Word 1slot Discrete 1747KE
1/2slot Discrete
2slot Block transfer
1746NIO4I,
2 Words 1slot Discrete
-NIO4V
1/2slot Discrete
2slot Block transfer
1746NI4,
1746NI4
3 or 4 Words 1slot Block transfer NO4V,
IMC110
IMC110
1/2slot Discrete
2slot Block transfer 1746BAS,
1746 BAS,
5 to 8 Words 1slot Block transfer NR4, NT4,
HSTP1
1/2slot Block transfer 1747DCM

The 1747-ASB module can block transfer map a maximum of eight


words.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Chapter 4
Configuration

This chapter presents the configuration options made through the


various DIP switch settings.

DIP Switch Information The 1747-ASB module parameters are configured by three DIP
switches, shown below. To assist you in the configuration of
multiple 1747-ASB modules, a configuration worksheet is provided
in appendix D.

SelfLocking Tab
DIP Switches

SW3

SW2

SW1

SERIAL NO.

CAT
N
O

N
O

N
O

SLC 500
REMOTE I/O ADAPTER MODULE
1

1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FRN

SER
 UL FOR HAZ. LOC. A196 SA  TEMPERATURE
CLASS 1, GROUPS A, B, C AND D, DIV. 2

LISTED IND. CONT. EQ.

CURRENT REQUIREMENT: 375mA


INSTALL IN SLOT ZERO OF MODULAR CHASSIS ONLY
IMPORTANT:
OPERATING
CODE T3C
Î
FAC 1M

ÎÎ
Î
MADE IN USA

SW3 SW2 SW1


N
O

N
O

N
O

Hold Last State Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Processor Restart Lockout Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Link Response Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup Reserved Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 2 Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode ASB Module Image Size Bit 1 Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
I/O Module Keying ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

ON
OFF

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–2 Configuration

N
O 1
2 DIP Switch SW1

Logical Rack Number


Logical Rack Number (SW11 through 6)
3 4 5 6 7
SW1

Logical Group Number SW1 switches 1 through 6 assign the 1747-ASB module a starting
8

logical rack number in the scanner’s image.


N
O

When configured as a complementary chassis (SW2 switch 3), the


1

Baud Rate
2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
3 4 5 6 7
SW2

Reserved 1747-ASB module can appear on the RIO link as any starting logical
ASB Module Image Size rack between 0 and 62 (0 to 76 octal).
8

When configured as a primary chassis (SW2 switch 3), the


N
O

Hold Last State 1747-ASB module can appear on the RIO link as any starting logical
1

Processor Restart Lockout


2

Link Response rack between 0 and 7.


SW3

3 4 5 6 7

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying
Logical rack one is the default setting as shipped from the factory.
8

ON The following table provides the logical rack numbers for PLC
OFF
processors.

Logical Rack Number (Octal) Switch Number (SW1)


1747 PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC
1 2 3 4 5 6
SN 2 3 5/15 5/25 5/40 5/60 5/250

0 1 0 - - - - 0 ON ON ON ON ON ON

1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 ON ON ON ON ON OFF

2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 ON ON ON ON OFF ON

3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF

5 4 4 4 4 4 ON ON ON OFF ON ON

6 5 5 5 5 5 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

7 6 6 6 6 6 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

7 7 7 7 7 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF

10 10 10 10 ON ON OFF ON ON ON

11 11 11 11 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF

12 12 12 12 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

13 13 13 13 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF

14 14 14 14 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

15 15 15 15 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF

16 16 16 16 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON

17 17 17 17 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

20 20 20 ON OFF ON ON ON ON

21 21 21 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF

22 22 22 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON

23 23 23 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

24 24 24 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON

25 25 25 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

26 26 26 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON

27 27 27 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

30 30 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON

31 31 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–3

1747 PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC


SN 2 3 5/15 5/25 5/40 5/60 5/250 1 2 3 4 5 6

32 32 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON

33 33 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

34 34 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON

35 35 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

36 36 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

37 37 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

40 OFF ON ON ON ON ON

41 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF

42 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON

43 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF

44 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON

45 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF

46 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON

47 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF

50 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON

51 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF

52 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

53 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

54 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON

55 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF

56 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON

57 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

60 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

61 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

62 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON

63 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

64 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON

65 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

66 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON

67 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

70 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON

71 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF

72 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON

73 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

74 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

75 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

76 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 Reserved

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–4 Configuration

Logical Group Number (SW17,8)


SW1 switches 7 and 8 determine the starting logical group.
N
O 1
2

Logical Rack Number Valid starting logical group numbers are determined by the:
3 4 5 6 7
SW1

• addressing mode (2-slot, 1-slot, or 1/2-slot)


Logical Group Number
• specialty I/O mode (discrete or block transfer)
8

The default position is logical group zero as shipped from the


N
O 1

Baud Rate
factory.
2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
3 4 5 6 7
SW2

Reserved

ASB Module Image Size Addressing Mode Specialty I/O Mode Valid Starting Logical Groups
8

2slot, 1slot, 1/2slot Block Transfer 0, 2, 4, 6


2slot, 1slot Discrete 0, 2, 4, 6
N
O

Hold Last State


1

Processor Restart Lockout


1/2slot Discrete 0, 4
2

Link Response
SW3

3 4 5 6 7

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying Logical Group Number DIP Switch Settings
8

ON SW1 SW1 SW1 SW1


OFF
N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O
11

1
2

2
3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
7

7
8

8
Group 0 Group 2 Group 4 Group 6

If an invalid starting logical group number is selected, an error


occurs.

DIP Switch SW2

Baud Rate (SW21,2)


SW2 switches 1 and 2 determine the baud rate the 1747-ASB
module operates at while communicating across the RIO link.

The default is 57.6K as shipped from the factory.

Baud Rate Maximum Cable Distance (Belden 9463)


57.6K baud 3048 meters (10,000 feet)
115.2K baud 1524 meters (5,000 feet)
230.4K baud 762 meters (2,500 feet)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–5

Baud Rate DIP Switch Settings

SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O
1

1
2

2
3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
7

7
8

8
57.6K 115.2K 230.4K Invalid

If the invalid switch setting is selected, a 1747-ASB module error


occurs.

Primary/Complementary Chassis (SW23)


N
O
1

SW2 switch 3 determines whether the 1747-ASB module appears to


2

Logical Rack Number


3 4 5 6 7
SW1

the scanner as a primary or complementary chassis.


Logical Group Number
Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis DIP Switch Settings
8

SW2 SW2
N
O
1

Baud Rate
N
O

N
O
2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
1

1
3 4 5 6 7
SW2

Reserved
2

2
3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
ASB Module Image Size
8

7
8

8
Primary Complementary
N
O

Hold Last State


1

Processor Restart Lockout


2

Link Response
SW3

3 4 5 6 7

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode
Specialty I/O Mode If you are not using complementary I/O, all 1747-ASB modules
I/O Module Keying
8

should be configured as complementary chassis. If a primary chassis


ON is configured and no complementary chassis exists, the scanner
OFF
wastes time trying to scan a complementary chassis that is not there.

Complementary I/O allows two 1747-ASB modules to overlap their


input and output images, creating one image within the scanner, thus
maximizing image space. The combined image is located where the
primary image is configured to reside. Complementary I/O is very
useful when portions of your input and output images are unused.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–6 Configuration

ATTENTION: Because the primary and


complementary chassis images overlap, input and
! specialty I/O modules must never share the same image
location. Inputs received by the scanner may be
incorrect and RIO block transfers are not serviced
properly.
If an output module shares its output image with
another output module, both output modules receive
the same output information.

If you want to use complementary I/O, two 1747-ASB modules


are required. One 1747-ASB module is configured as a primary
chassis, the other as a complementary chassis. If a primary chassis
exists, it is scanned first.

The 1747-ASB modules in the primary and complementary chassis


must be configured to have the same:
• addressing mode, using SW3-5,6
• logical group number, using SW1-7,8
• baud rate, using SW2-1,2
• image size, using SW2-5 through 8

ATTENTION: If the addressing mode, logical group


number, baud rate, and image size are not the same,
! unpredictable operation of both 1747-ASB modules
results. No 1747-ASB module errors occur.

The 1747-ASB modules in the primary and complementary chassis


do not have to be configured to have the same:
• hold last state selection
• processor restart lockout selection
• specialty I/O mode
• I/O module keying mode
• link response selection
In addition, the 1747-ASB modules do not have to have to be
controlling the same number of slots or type of chassis.

Important: If a 1747-ASB module is configured as a primary


chassis and as the last chassis, a 1747-ASB module
error occurs. Only complementary chassis can be
configured as last chassis. For information concerning
last chassis selection, refer to page 4–19.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–7

Primary and complementary chassis cannot have the same logical


rack number. The logical rack numbers must be assigned to the
primary and complementary racks as shown below:

Primary Chassis Complementary Chassis Logical Rack Number


Logical Rack Number➀ Decimal Octal
0 8 108
1 9 118
2 10 128
3 11 138
4 12 148
5 13 158
6 14 168
7 15 178
➀ If a 1747ASB module is configured as a primary chassis with a logical rack number greater than
7, a 1747ASB module error occurs.

ATTENTION: If the logical rack numbers are not


properly assigned, unpredictable operation of both
! 1747-ASB modules results. No 1747-ASB module
errors occur.

Important: Some processors and/or scanners have configuration


limitations when using complementary I/O in the
addressing modes. Refer to the appropriate PLC or
scanner manual for more information.
The following example illustrates how I/O modules requiring two
words of the input or output image can leave unused image space.

Complementary I/O allows two chassis to overlap their input and


output images, creating one image within the scanner.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–8 Configuration

I O I O I O I O O I O I O I O I
I = Input Module
O = Output Module

Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Slot Pair 1 2 3 4 Slot Pair 1 2 3 4

Primary Chassis Complementary Chassis


Primary Chassis Configured As: Complementary Chassis Configured As:
Logical Rack Number 0 Logical Rack Number 8 (decimal)
Logical Group Number 0 Logical Group Number 0
Image Size (logical groups) 16 Image Size (logical groups) 16
Addressing Mode 1/2slot Addressing Mode 1/2slot
Primary/Complementary Primary Primary/Complementary Complementary

Primary Chassis I/O Image Complementary Chassis I/O Image


Input Image Output Image Input Image Output Image
from Primary Chassis from Primary Chassis from Complementary Chassis from Complementary Chassis
17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal

Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1


Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1
1 1 1 1
Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2
Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2
Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3
Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3
2 2 2 2
Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4
Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4
Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot Pair Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot Pair Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot Pair Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot Pair
Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5
3 3 3 3
Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6
Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6
Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7
Slot 7 Slot 7 4 Slot 7 Slot 7 4 Slot 7 Slot 7 4 Slot 7 Slot 7 4
Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8
Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8
= unused
image
space

Scanner's I/O Image Input Image Output Image


17 10 7 0 Octal 17 10 7 0 Octal
Both images are overlapped in the 15 8 7 0 Decimal 15 8 7 0 Decimal

scanner. The overlapped image Group 0 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1


appears where the primary chassis Group 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 1
image is configured to reside. Group 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2
Logical Group 3 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2 Slot 2
In this case, the primary chassis Rack 0 Group 4 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3 Slot 3
image is configured as starting Group 5 Slot 3 Slot 3 2 Slot 3 Slot 3 2
logical rack 0 and starting logical Group 6 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4
group 0. Group 7 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4 Slot 4
Slot Pair Slot Pair
Group 0 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5
Group 1 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5
3 3
Group 2 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6
Logical Group 3 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6
Group 4 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7
Rack 1 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7 Slot 7
Group 5 4 4
Group 6 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8
Group 7 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8 Slot 8

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–9

Reserved (SW24)
N
O
1
2 SW2 switch 4 must remain in the ON position.
Logical Rack Number
3 4 5 6 7
SW1

Reserved DIP Switch Setting


Logical Group Number
8

SW2

N
O
N
O

1
1

Baud Rate

2
2

Primary/Complementary Chassis

3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 7
SW2

Reserved

ASB Module Image Size

7
8
8

Reserved
N
O

Hold Last State


1

Processor Restart Lockout


2

Link Response
SW3

3 4 5 6 7

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode
ASB Module Image Size (SW25, 6, 7, 8)
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying SW2 switches 5 through 8 determine the size of the 1747-ASB
8

module’s image that is reserved in the scanner.


ON
OFF
You must also make sure you do not exceed the maximum logical
rack number, described on page 4–11.

Image size selection examples are found on page 4–12.

Examples of odd size chassis/images are provided, starting on


page 4–13.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–10 Configuration

N
O The 1747-ASB module image size can be between 2 and 32 logical
groups, in 2 logical group increments.
1
2

Logical Rack Number


3 4 5 6 7
SW1

ASB Module Image Size DIP Switch Settings


Logical Group Number
8

SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O
N
O

1
1

Baud Rate

2
2

Primary/Complementary Chassis

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 7
SW2

Reserved

ASB Module Image Size

7
8

8
8

Number of Logical Groups 2 4 6 8


N
O

Hold Last State


1

Processor Restart Lockout


2

Link Response
SW3

3 4 5 6 7

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2


Addressing Mode
Specialty I/O Mode N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O
I/O Module Keying
8

1
2

2
3 4 5 6 7

3 4 5 6 7

3 4 5 6 7

3 4 5 6 7
ON
OFF
8

8
Number of Logical Groups 10 12 14 16

SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2


N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O
1

1
2

2
3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
7

7
8

8
Number of Logical Groups 18 20 22 24

SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2


N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O
1

1
2

2
3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
7

7
8

Number of Logical Groups 26 28 30 32

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–11

Important: If after assigning your 1747-ASB module image size,


you exceed logical rack 62 in complementary mode
(SW2 switch 3) or logical rack 7 in primary mode
(SW2 switch 3), an error occurs. When assigning the
starting logical rack and group numbers, make sure the
size of the 1747-ASB module image does not exceed
the maximum logical rack number, as shown below:
Complementary Mode
Bit Number (Octal) 17 10 7 0
Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Logical Group 3
Group 4
Rack 59 Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0 If you have selected logical
Group 1
Group 2
rack 60, group 0 as your
Group 3
starting address, the largest
Logical Group 4 1747ASB module image size
Rack 60 Group 5 you can create is 24 groups (3
Group 6 logical racks). Assigning a
Group 7 larger 1747ASB module
Group 0
Group 1
image size exceeds the
Group 2
maximum logical rack number.
Logical Group 3
Group 4
Rack 61 Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Logical Group 3

Rack 62
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Primary Mode
Bit Number (Octal) 17 10 7 0
Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Logical Group 3
Group 4
Rack 4 Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0 If you have selected logical
Group 1
Group 2
rack 5, group 0 as your
Group 3
starting address, the largest
Logical Group 4 1747ASB module image size
Rack 5 Group 5 you can create is 24 groups (3
Group 6 logical racks). Assigning a
Group 7 larger 1747ASB module
Group 0
Group 1
image size exceeds the
Group 2
maximum logical rack number.
Logical Group 3
Group 4
Rack 6 Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Logical Group 3

Rack 7
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–12 Configuration

N
O The following examples illustrate how the selection of the
1747-ASB image size is determined by:
1
2

Logical Rack Number


• the addressing mode (2-slot, 1-slot, 1/2-slot)
3 4 5 6 7
SW1

Logical Group Number


• the number of chassis slots required
8

1747ASB Module
N
O

1Slot Addressing With Six Slots Available


1

Baud Rate
2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Using 1slot addressing and a 7slot chassis, six
3 4 5 6 7
SW2

Reserved
slots are available for I/O modules. To map all
ASB Module Image Size six slots into the scanner image, the 1747ASB
module image size must be 6 logical groups.
8

Slot Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
N
O

Hold Last State

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
1

Processor Restart Lockout


2

Link Response
SW3

3 4 5 6 7

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying 1/2Slot Addressing With Ten Slots Available
8

1747-ASB Module
Using 1/2slot addressing and a 4slot chassis
ON attached to a 7slot chassis, ten slots are
OFF available for I/O modules. To map all ten slots
into the scanner image, the 1747ASB module
image size must be 20 logical groups.
If an image size of 16 logical groups is
chosen, slots 9 and 10 are unused. If an I/O
module is installed in slots 9 or 10, the Slot Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1747ASB module ignores it unless the I/O
Group 0,1
Group 2,3
Group 4,5

Group 6,7
Group 8,9
Group 10,11
Group 12,13
Group 14,15
Group 16,17
Group 18,19
module faults.

2Slot Addressing With Nine Slots Available 1747ASB Module


Using 2slot addressing and a 10slot chassis,
nine slots are available for I/O modules.
4 Logical Groups
Selecting 4 logical groups leaves slot 9 unused.
If an I/O module is in slot 9, the 1747ASB
module ignores it, unless the I/O module faults.
Selecting 6 logical groups leaves an unused
logical group in the 1747ASB module image. Slot Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
The image normally assigned to slot 10 can be
used by slot 9 (providing one full word).
Group 0

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

1747ASB Module

6 Logical Groups

Slot Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Group 0

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–13

Special Image and Chassis Sometimes, logical slots and groups are not mapped due to chassis
Size Considerations size and selected image size because:
• There is not enough 1747-ASB module image to map all of the
available slots.
• The 1747-ASB image size exceeds requirements for available
slots.
• One slot of a pair is present, with 1747-ASB module image
available for both slots.
• Both slots of a pair are available, but there is only enough
1747-ASB module image space available for one slot.

Not Enough 1747ASB Module Image to Map All of the Available


Slots

When there is not enough 1747-ASB module image to map all of the
available slots, any I/O modules in the unassigned slots are ignored.
If one of the unassigned I/O modules fault, it triggers a 1747-ASB
module fault.

Modules should not be installed above slot 30. Otherwise a


1747-ASB error occurs.

In the following example, a 7-slot chassis contains a 1747-ASB


module with an image size of 4 logical groups using 1-slot
addressing.
1747-ASB Module

Using 1slot addressing and a 7slot chassis, six slots are


available for I/O modules. Because the image size is 4 logical
groups, 2 slots are not used. Slots 5 and 6 are ignored, even if
I/O modules are installed in them. However, If one of the
modules in slots 5 or 6 faults, a 1747ASB module error occurs.
Slot Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Not Used
Not Used

4 Logical Groups

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–14 Configuration

1747ASB Image Size Exceeds Slot Requirements

When there are not enough slots available to use the entire
1747-ASB module image, output image data received by the
1747-ASB module for the extra slots is ignored. All input image
data sent to the scanner for the extra slots is zero.
1747ASB Module

Using 1slot addressing and a 7slot chassis, six


slots are available for I/O modules. Because the
image size is 8 logical groups, 2 logical groups are
not used. When there are not enough slots

Not Used
Not Used
available to use the entire 1747ASB module
image, output image data received by the Slot Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1747ASB module for the extra slots is ignored. All

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4

Group 5

Group 6
Group 7
input image data sent to the scanner for the extra
slots is zero.
8 Logical Groups

One Slot of Pair is Present, and 1747ASB Module Image is


Available for Both Slots

When one slot of a pair is present and 1747-ASB module image is


available for both slots, the single slot can use the extra image space.
1747ASB module

Using 1slot addressing and a 4slot chassis, three


slots are available for I/O modules. Because the
image size is 4 logical groups, 1 logical group is not
assigned to a slot. Since slot 4 is not present, the
module in slot 3 can use both logical groups assigned
to the slot pair. This could be done by installing a 32
point input module in slot 3.
Slot Number 0 1 2 3
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
4 Logical Groups

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–15

Both Slots Of A Pair Are Available But There Is Only Enough


1747ASB Module Image Space Available For One Slot

This condition only occurs in 1/2-slot addressing.

When both slots of a pair are available but there is only enough
1747-ASB module image space available for one slot, the lower
numbered slot uses the available image space. If a four word
specialty module (i.e., 1746-NI4) is installed in this slot and the
1747-ASB module is configured for the discrete specialty mode, a
1747-ASB error occurs.
1747ASB Module

Using 1/2slot addressing and a 7slot chassis, six


slots are available for I/O modules. Because the
image size is 6 logical groups, the last two logical
groups of the image can only be used by slot 3 (slots
4, 5, and 6 are ignored unless the module faults).

Slot Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Group 0, 1
Group 2, 3
Group 4, 5
Not Used
Not Used

Not Used
6 Logical Groups

DIP Switch SW3

Hold Last State (SW31)


SW3 switch 1 allows discrete outputs to remain in their last state
when certain, but not all, system faults occur.

Hold Last State DIP Switch Settings


SW3 SW3
N
O

N
O
1

1
2

2
3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
7

7
8

Hold Last State Do Not Hold Last State

ATTENTION: If switch 1 is set to the ON position,


outputs connected to this chassis remain in their last
! state when a fault occurs and machine motion may
continue after fault detection. We recommend that you
set switch 1 to the OFF position to de-energize outputs
wired to this chassis when a fault is detected.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–16 Configuration

When hold last state is selected, outputs are held in their last state
when any of the following conditions occur:
• RIO link communications is lost due to a broken cable or scanner
fault.
• The 1747-ASB module is inhibited by the scanner.
• The 1747-ASB module receives reset, adapter decide commands
from the scanner.
When the discrete outputs are being held in their last state, consider
the following:
• The specialty modules operate as if they are being controlled by
an SLC processor that is in the test mode. See the specialty I/O
module’s manual to determine the response to this condition.
• The specialty I/O module’s inputs are still read by the 1747-ASB
module. However, the specialty I/O module’s outputs are not
modified by the 1747-ASB module.
Your system must be designed so it is in a safe state when all discrete
outputs are off, or cleared.

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the hold last
state switch in the OFF position (do not hold last state).

ATTENTION: When hold last state is selected and


specialty I/O modules are being used, the operation of
! the specialty I/O modules must be considered when the
discrete outputs are being held in their last state.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–17

Processor Restart Lockout (SW32)


N
O
1
2 SW3 switch 2 determines whether your system automatically
Logical Rack Number
3 4 5 6 7
SW1

resumes RIO link communications with the scanner when:


Logical Group Number • Link communications are temporarily interrupted. For example,
8

by removing and replacing the RIO connector.


• The 1747-ASB module is inhibited and re-enabled.
N
O
1

Baud Rate
2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Processor Restart Lockout DIP Switch Settings
3 4 5 6 7
SW2

Reserved

ASB Module Image Size


SW3 SW3
8

N
O

N
O
1

1
N
O

Hold Last State

2
1

Processor Restart Lockout

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
2

Link Response
SW3

3 4 5 6 7

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode

7
8

8
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying
8

Automatically Restart Lock Processor Out


ON
OFF
While in the OFF position (lock processor out) and communications
are restored, the 1747-ASB module does not respond to any
communication commands until 1747-ASB module terminals IN and
RET are momentarily shorted together. Processor restart lockout
prevents RIO link communications (by locking out the scanner and
processor) and does not allow the 1747-ASB module to exchange
any I/O data or respond to any RIO commands, such as reset adapter
reset commands.

RIO link communications can be restarted by:


• momentarily shorting pins 5 and 6 together (See chapter 5 for
wiring information.)
• cycling power on any chassis controlled by the 1747-ASB
module
While in the ON position, the 1747-ASB module always attempts to
restart communications with the scanner if RIO link
communications are interrupted or if the 1747-ASB module is
inhibited and re-enabled.

While in the ON position, the 1747-ASB module does not respond if


terminals 5 and 6 are shorted together.

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position ON (automatic restart).

ATTENTION: Cycling power on any chassis


removes the processor restart lockout condition.
!

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–18 Configuration

Important: After communications to all of the 1747-ASB module’s


logical devices are established, selecting processor
restart lockout disables PLC auto configurations on the
1747-ASB module.
If the 1747-ASB module has not received communications for all of
its logical devices, you are able to perform PLC auto configurations
once the 1747-ASB module is powered up. If processor restart
lockout is not selected, you are able to perform PLC auto
configurations on the 1747-ASB module.

Important: Selecting processor restart lockout affects the


1747-ASB module inhibit functionality. See page C–5
of this manual for more information.

Link Response Time (SW33)


SW3 switch 3 allows you to select a longer (restricted) response time
when communicating at 57.6K and 115.2K baud. 230.4K baud
operates with a short (unrestricted) response time, regardless of the
switch setting.

The link response time is the time it takes an adapter to respond to


data received from the scanner. Some scanners require a longer
response time than other scanners. Operating unrestricted reduces
overall RIO scan time, but requires a faster scanner.

Link Response Time DIP Switch Settings

SW3 SW3
N
O

N
O
1

1
2

2
3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
7

7
8

Restricted Unrestricted

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position ON (restricted).

The following table lists the scanners that require restricted


operation.

Catalog Number Description


1775S4A, S4B I/O scannerprogrammer interface module for PLC3

1775SR, SR5 Remote scanner/distribution panel for PLC 3/10

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–19

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup (SW34)


N
O 1
2 SW3 switch 4 is used for last chassis selection when the 1747-ASB
Logical Rack Number
3 4 5 6 7
SW1

module is connected to a PLC-2, PLC-5, or SLC scanner (Catalog


Logical Group Number
Number 1747-SN). When connected to a PLC-3, it selects the
8

Processor Backup function. Refer to the PLC-3 user manual for a


description of Processor Backup.
N
O 1

Baud Rate
2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup DIP Switch Settings
3 4 5 6 7
SW2

Reserved

ASB Module Image Size


SW3 SW3
8

N
O

N
O
1

1
N
O

Hold Last State

2
1

Processor Restart Lockout

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
2

Link Response
SW3

3 4 5 6 7

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode

7
Specialty I/O Mode

8
I/O Module Keying
8

Not Last Chassis Last Chassis


ON
OFF

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position ON (not last chassis).

A 1747-ASB module should be configured as the last chassis when:


• Its image crosses logical rack boundaries and no other adapter
uses a higher group number within its last logical rack.
• It uses a portion of a logical rack and no other adapter uses a
higher group number within that logical rack.
The following examples illustrate last chassis conditions.

Bit Number (Octal) 17


Scanner Image
10 7 0 Bit Number (Octal) 17
Scanner Image 10 7 0
Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0 Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0
Group 0 Group 0
Group 1 Group 1 1747ASB Module 1
Group 2
1747ASB Module 1 Group 2
1747ASB Module 2
Logical Group 3 Logical Group 3
Rack 0 Group 4
Rack 0 Group 4 Not Last Chassis
Group 5 Group 5 1747ASB Module 3
Group 6 Group 6
Group 7 Last Chassis Group 7 Not Last Chassis
Group 0 Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 1
Group 2
Last Chassis
Logical Group 3 Logical Group 3
Rack 1 Group 4 1747ASB Module 2 Rack 1 Group 4
Group 5 Group 5
Group 6 Group 6
Group 7 Group 7
Group 0 Group 0
Group 1 Group 1
Group 2 Group 2
Logical Group 3 Not Last Chassis Logical Group 3

Rack 2 Group 4
Group 5 1747ASB Module 3 Rack 2 Group 4
Group 5
Group 6 Group 6
Group 7 Last Chassis Group 7
Group 0 Group 0
Group 1 1747ASB Module 4 Group 1
Group 2 Group 2
Logical Group 3 Last Chassis Logical Group 3
Rack 3 Group 4
Rack 3 Group 4
Group 5 Group 5
Group 6 Group 6
Group 7 Group 7

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–20 Configuration

Important: When using complementary I/O, do not configure a


primary chassis as the last chassis, otherwise a
1747-ASB module error occurs.

Addressing Mode (SW35,6)


SW3 switches 5 and 6 determine the addressing mode of
2-slot, 1-slot, or 1/2-slot.

Addressing Mode DIP Switch Settings

SW3 SW3 SW3 SW3

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O
1

1
2

2
3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
7

7
8

8
2slot 1slot 1/2slot Invalid

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position selected for 1-slot addressing.

If the invalid switch setting is selected, a 1747-ASB module error


occurs.

1/2-slot addressing is not supported by the PLC-2 family of


processors.

Specialty I/O Mode (SW37)


SW3 switch 7 determines the specialty I/O mode (discrete or block
transfer).

Specialty I/O Mode DIP Switch Settings

SW3 SW3
N
O

N
O
1

1
2

2
3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6
7

7
8

Discrete Block Transfer

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position ON (discrete).

For an overview of discrete and block transfer modes, refer to


page 3–13.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–21

I/O Module Keying (SW38)


N
O
1
2 SW3 switch 8 provides I/O module keying, that prevents you from
Logical Rack Number
3 4 5 6 7
SW1

operating the 1747-ASB module when the I/O module or DIP switch
Logical Group Number
configuration (other than the keying DIP switch itself) differs from
8

the last time you saved it. There are two modes, save and check.
N
O

When power is applied in save mode and the DIP switch and I/O
1

Baud Rate
2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
module configurations are valid, the 1747-ASB module saves the
3 4 5 6 7
SW2

Reserved

ASB Module Image Size DIP switch and I/O module configuration in non-volatile memory.
8

When power is applied in check mode, the 1747-ASB module


N
O

Hold Last State compares the stored DIP switch and I/O module configuration to the
1

Processor Restart Lockout


current DIP switch and I/O module configuration. If the
2

Link Response
SW3

3 4 5 6 7

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode configurations do not match, a 1747-ASB module error occurs.
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying
8

Important: Use save mode during setup and debug. After


ON debugging is complete, power up in save mode one last
OFF
time. Remove power and place the 1747-ASB module
in check mode prior to normal operation.
I/O Module Keying DIP Switch Settings

SW3 SW3
N
O

N
O
1

1
2

2
3 4 5 6 7

3 4 5 6 7
8

Save Mode Check Mode

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position ON (save mode).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


4–22 Configuration

Switch Setting Summary The following is a summary listing the various DIP switch settings.

SW1
SW1
• Logical Rack Number

N
O
Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB) For details, see page 4–2.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Logical Rack Number Bit 3 • Logical Group Number
Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
7 8 Group
Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB) ON ON 0 (default)
Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB) ON OFF 2
OFF ON 4
OFF OFF 6

SW2 SW2
N
O

Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB) • Baud Rate


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB)


1 2 Baud Rate
Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved ON ON 57.6K (default)
ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB) ON OFF 115.2K
ASB Module Image Size Bit 2 OFF ON 230.4K
ASB Module Image Size Bit 1 OFF OFF INVALID
ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB)
• Primary/Complementary
Chassis
ON = Primary
OFF = Complementary
(default)
• 1747-ASB Module Image
Size
For details, see page 4–9.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Configuration 4–23

SW3 SW3

N
O
Hold Last State • Hold Last State

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
ON = Hold Last State
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup OFF = Do Not Hold Last State (default)
Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB)
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB)
• Processor Restart Lockout
Specialty I/O Mode ON = Automatic Restart (default)
I/O Module Keying OFF = Processor Lockout

• Link Response
ON = Restricted (default)
OFF = Unrestricted

• Last Chassis
ON = Not Last Chassis (default)
OFF = Last Chassis

• Addressing Mode
5 6 Address
ON ON Invalid
ON OFF 1slot Addressing (default)
OFF ON 1/2slot Addressing
OFF OFF 2slot Addressing
• Specialty I/O Mode
ON = Discrete (default)
OFF = Block Transfer

• I/O Module Keying


ON = Save Mode (default)
OFF = Check Mode

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Chapter 5
Installation and Wiring

This chapter presents installation and wiring information for the


remote I/O adapter module. For information concerning chassis
installation and I/O modules, refer to appendix B.

European Union Directive If this product is installed within the European Union or EEA
Compliance regions and has the CE mark, the following regulations apply.

EMC Directive

This apparatus is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336


Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) using a technical construction
file and the following standards, in whole or in part:
• EN 50081-2 EMC – Generic Emission Standard, Part 2 –
Industrial Environment
• EN 50082-2 EMC – Generic Immunity Standard, Part 2 –
Industrial Environment
The product described in this manual is intended for use in an
industrial environment.

Installing the 1747ASB Use the following steps to install the 1747-ASB module in a remote
Module chassis.

ATTENTION: Disconnect power before attempting


to install or remove the module.
!
1. Install the module in slot 0 of the remote chassis by aligning the
circuit board with the chassis card guide.
The 1747-ASB module must only be installed in slot 0 (the left
slot) of the remote chassis. Do not install the 1747-ASB module
in the remote expansion chassis.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


5–2 Installation and Wiring

2. Slide the module into the chassis until the top and bottom tabs
lock into place. To remove the module, press and hold the release
located on each self-locking tab and slide the module out.
3. Cover all unused slots with the Card Slot Filler, Catalog Number
1746-N2.

Module Release

Card Guide

Link Wiring The modules are connected in a daisy chain configuration on any
RIO link. A daisy chain network is formed by connecting network
devices together in a serial manner using Belden 9463 cable. Belden
9463 cable is the only approved cable for Allen-Bradley RIO links.

The total number of adapters allowed on the RIO link are:


• 32 if the scanner and all adapters on the RIO link have extended
node capability
• 16 if the scanner or any adapter does not have extended node
capability
Refer to page 1–9 for information on extended node capability.

There are no restrictions governing the spacing between the devices,


as long as the maximum cable distance is not exceeded. Refer to the
table below for baud rate and maximum cable distances.

Baud Rate Maximum Cable Distance


57.6K baud 3048 meters (10,000 feet)
115.2K baud 1525 meters (5,000 feet)
230.4K baud 750 meters (2,500 feet)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Installation and Wiring 5–3

Important: No two devices can be connected to the same point on


the link. An example of correct and incorrect link
wiring is shown below.

Correct Link Wiring 1747ASB Module

To Scanner
1747ASB Module

1747ASB Module

Incorrect Link Wiring


1747ASB Module

To Scanner
1747ASB Module

1747ASB Module

This is an incorrect connection!

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


5–4 Installation and Wiring

Link Termination

A 6-pin keyed connector provides a quick connection to the RIO link


and processor restart lockout switch. A user-supplied terminating
resistor must be attached across line one and two of the connector at
each end of the RIO link. The size of the resistor depends on the
baud rate and whether the scanner and all adapters have extended
node capability, as shown in the table below. The cable shield must
be connected to chassis ground only at one end of the RIO link.

Baud Rate Resistor Size


Using Extended
All Baud Rates 82W 1/2 Watt
Node Capability
Not Using 57.6K baud 150W 1/2 Watt
Extended
e ded Node
ode 115.2K baud 150W 1/2 Watt
C bili
Capability 230.4K baud 82W 1/2 Watt

Important: If the signal integrity on the RIO link is compromised


by environmental noise, improper termination, and/or
improper cable installation, the 1747-ASB module scan
rate drops. This is indicated by a pronounced flickering
of the status display.
To Scanner's
Connector

Terminating Resistor
Chassis Ground LINE 1 (Blue wire)
SHLD (Shield wire)
LINE 2 (Clear wire)
NC (No Connect)
IN Status Display
RET
ADAPTER
COMM FAULT

STATUS
1

(MSB)
2
3

LOGICAL
RACK
SW1

4 5 6

(LSB)
LOGICAL
7

GROUP
8
N
O

LINE 1 BAUD
1

RATE
2

SHLD
Blue PRI/COMP
3

LINE 2
SW2

Shield
RSV
4 5 6

NC (MSB)
IN
Clear RET
IMAGE
SIZE
7 8

(LSB)
N
O

HLS
1 2 3

Terminating Resistor PRL


RESP
LAST CHA
SW3

4 5 6

ADDR
MODE
SP MODE
7

KEY
8

1747-ASB

Important: Do not connect anything to the NC (No Connect)


terminal.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Installation and Wiring 5–5

Wiring a Processor Restart When processor restart lockout is enabled (SW3-2) and
Lockout Switch communications are restored, the 1747-ASB module does not
respond to any type of communications, or communication
commands until terminals IN and RET are momentarily shorted
together. This occurs while the RIO scanner is attempting to
communicate with the 1747-ASB module.

ATTENTION: Cycling power on any 1747-ASB


module chassis removes the processor restart lockout
! condition by re-initializing the 1747-ASB module.

You must use a momentary switch (Class 1, Division 2) to short the


terminals together. The processor restart lockout is removed as soon
as the switch toggles back to the open circuit position.

A maximum of five feet of 14–24 gauge wire (solid or stranded) is


recommended to connect the switch to the terminal.

ADAPTER
COMM FAULT

STATUS

1
(MSB)

2
3
LOGICAL
RACK

SW1

4 5 6
(LSB)
LOGICAL

7
GROUP

8
N
O
Momentary Switch LINE 1 BAUD

1
RATE
LINE 1 (Blue wire)

2
SHLD
PRI/COMP
SHLD (Shield wire)

3
LINE 2

SW2
RSV

4 5 6
NC (MSB)
LINE 2 (Clear wire) IN IMAGE

NC (No Connect) RET SIZE

7 8
(LSB)

IN
RET

N
O
14 - 24 gauge wire
HLS

1 2 3
PRL
RESP
LAST CHA
SW3

4 5 6
ADDR
MODE
SP MODE

7
KEY

8
1747-ASB

Important: Do not connect anything to the NC (No Connect)


terminal.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


5–6 Installation and Wiring

I/O Module Addressing Labels Due to the 1747-ASB module’s addressing modes and RIO link
operation, the I/O modules controlled by the 1747-ASB module are
addressed by the PLC processor on a logical rack, logical group basis
and by the SLC processor on a 1747-SN scanner slot and word basis.
A remote PLC and SLC label kit is included with each 1747-ASB
module to assist you in addressing your I/O modules.

Use the labels that correspond to the type of master you are using
(PLC or SLC). Attach the Remote PLC or SLC label to the outside
bottom of each I/O module in your 1747-ASB chassis. Fill out each
label completely. RIO address label examples are provided on
pages 8–5 and 8–14 (SLC), and 8–23 (PLC).

Important: When the 1747-ASB module is used with PLC


processors, use octal labels with discrete 1746 I/O
modules that have 16 or more points. (See page 5–7.)

INPUT INPUT

0-7 10 - 17 0-7 8 - 15
Rack Group(s) SN Slot
I:
SN Word(s)
O:
BT Discrete BT Discrete
Remote PLC System Remote SLC System

Remote PLC Label Remote SLC Label

0-7 10 - 17 0-7 8 - 15
Rack Group(s) SN Slot
I: SN Word(s)
O:
BT Discrete
BT Discrete
Remote PLC System Remote SLC System

Using a PLC as a Master

If you are using a PLC processor as a master, each I/O module is


addressed by logical rack and logical group, regardless of what
physical slot it is in.

Using an SLC as a Master

If you are using an SLC processor as a master, each I/O module is


addressed by the physical slot number of the 1747-SN scanner and
the word that the I/O module uses in the scanner image. Data is
transferred on the network by logical rack and logical group number.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Installation and Wiring 5–7

Octal Label Kit Installation The octal filter and door label must be used when working with a
PLC processor as a master. An octal label kit is included with the
I/O modules listed in the table on the following page. The kits can
also be obtained through your Allen-Bradley distributor.

Applying the Octal Filter Label


1. Remove the octal filter label from its paper carrier.
2. Align the octal filter label numbers horizontally to the module
color bar and over the decimal filter numbers, as shown in the
illustration below.
3. Apply the octal label to the filter.
4. Press firmly to ensure proper adhesion of the label.

Applying the Octal Door Label


1. Remove the octal door label from its paper carrier.
2. Align it over the decimal door label on the inside of the door.
3. Press firmly to ensure proper adhesion of the label.

Module Color Bar Decimal Filter Label Octal Filter Label

INPUT

OCTAL

Octal Door Label

1746-XXXX 1746-XXXX (OCTAL)

Decimal Door Label

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


5–8 Installation and Wiring

Octal Kit and I/O Module Information


Octal Kit Catalog Applies to I/O
Number 1746 Module 1746

RL40 IA16
RL41 IB16
RL42 IG16
RL43 IM16
RL44 IN16
RL45 IV16
RL46 ITB16
RL47 ITV16
RL50 OA16
RL51 OB16
RL52 OG16
RL53 OV16
RL54 OW16
RL55 OBP16
RL56 OVP16
RL57 OAP12
RL58 IC16
RL59 IH16
RL60 IB32
RL61 IV32
RL70 OB32
RL71 OV32

➀ Kit available with series C I/O modules.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Chapter 6
StartUp and Operation

This chapter guides you through:


• system start-up
• powerup and initialization sequences
• initial link communications
• normal operation
• communication exceptions
• remote expansion chassis power loss
• invalid RIO link transfers
• testing the 1747-ASB module

System StartUp Make sure SW3-8 is ON (save mode) while you setup and debug
your system. When you have completed debugging your system:
1. Cycle the power one last time in save mode (SW3-8 ON).
2. Remove power from the system.
3. Remove the 1747-ASB module and set SW3-8 to the OFF
position (check mode).
4. Replace the 1747-ASB module in slot 0.
5. Apply power to your system.
Any future changes to the 1747-ASB module’s DIP switch or I/O
module configuration results in a 1747-ASB module error, as long as
the 1747-ASB module is in check mode.

Powerup and Initialization The powerup and initialization sequence depends on whether the
Sequences 1747-ASB module is in the save or check mode (SW3-8). RIO
communications do not commence until a powerup and initialization
sequence is complete.

Power must be applied to all of the remote chassis and remote


expansion chassis controlled by the 1747-ASB module before this
sequence can be completed. If the remote expansion chassis are not
powered, a 1747-ASB module error occurs.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


6–2 Start-Up and Operation

Save Mode

When power is applied in save mode, the 1747-ASB module:


1. Performs power up diagnostics
2. Reads and verifies the actual DIP switch and I/O module
configuration
3. Saves the DIP switch and I/O module configuration
4. Waits for RIO link communications from the scanner

Check Mode

When power is applied in check mode, the 1747-ASB module:


1. Performs power up diagnostics
2. Verifies the stored configuration integrity
3. Compares the actual DIP switch, I/O module and chassis
configurations to the stored configurations
4. Waits for RIO link communications from the scanner
1747-ASB module errors found during powerup and initialization are
noted in chapter 7.

Normal Operation After successfully completing a powerup and initialization sequence,


the 1747-ASB module waits to receive RIO link communications
from the scanner for all of its logical devices. Once the 1747-ASB
module receives RIO link communication for all of its logical
devices, it begins normal operation.

During normal operation (PLC or SLC in Run mode), the 1747-ASB


module appears as shown below:

ADAPTER
COMM FAULT

Green COMM LED is on. Red FAULT LED is off.

STATUS

Status display
indicates a run
condition.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Start-Up and Operation 6–3

Communication Exceptions A communication exception is not an error because once the


exception is corrected, the 1747-ASB module begins normal
operation without the need to cycle remote chassis or remote
expansion chassis power. Communication exceptions are conditions
that prevent normal RIO link communications. They may even be
purposely used to change the operating state of the 1747-ASB
module.

If a communication exception exists with one logical device under


the 1747-ASB module’s control, the 1747-ASB module treats all
logical devices under its control as if they too have the same
condition. For example, if one logical device is inhibited, the
1747-ASB module treats all of its logical devices as if they too were
inhibited.

Communication exceptions can only occur after the 1747-ASB


module has first received communications from the scanner for all of
its logical devices.

If the 1747-ASB module is more than one logical device, more than
one communication exception may be present at the same time. If
this occurs, they are handled on a priority basis.

Priority Condition
1 Loss of RIO link communications
2 Inhibits
3 Reset, adapter reset commands
4 Reset, adapter decide commands

Therefore, if one of the 1747-ASB module’s logical devices is


receiving reset adapter decide commands and another is inhibited,
the 1747-ASB module treats all of its logical devices under its
control as if they too were inhibited. Once the inhibit condition is
cleared, the module treats all of its logical devices as if they were
receiving reset adapter decide commands.

Inhibit Condition

When any of the 1747-ASB module’s logical devices are inhibited


before communication with all of its logical devices occur one time:
• The inhibited logical devices do not communicate on the RIO
link.
• The enabled logical devices communicate on the RIO link.
• The 1747-ASB module does not send output data to any of its
output modules, even those that are enabled.
• The 1747-ASB module does not process any RIO block transfer
writes.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


6–4 Start-Up and Operation

• The 1747-ASB module sends new input data from its input
modules to the scanner for enabled devices.
• The 1747-ASB module processes RIO block transfers reads for
enabled devices.
The position of the processor restart lockout switch (PRL) affects the
1747-ASB module’s inhibit functionality. If processor restart
lockout is selected, and any logical device assigned to the 1747-ASB
module is inhibited after all of the logical devices have received RIO
link communications from the scanner at least once:
• All of the 1747-ASB module’s logical devices stop
communicating on the RIO link.
• The 1747-ASB module does not send any output data to any of its
output modules.
• Discrete outputs are held in their last state if hold last state is
selected, or discrete outputs are reset if hold last state is not
selected.
• The 1747-ASB module does not process any RIO block transfers.
If processor restart lockout is not selected and any logical device
assigned to the 1747-ASB module is inhibited after all of the logical
devices have received RIO link communications from the scanner at
least once:
• The inhibited logical devices stop communicating on the RIO
link.
• The enabled logical devices continue to communicate on the RIO
link.
• The 1747-ASB module does not send new output data to any
logical device output module, even those that are enabled.
• Discrete outputs are held in their last state if hold last state is
selected, or discrete outputs are reset if hold last state is not
selected.
• The 1747-ASB module does not process any RIO block transfer
writes.
• The 1747-ASB module sends new input data from its input
modules to the scanner for enabled logical devices.
• The 1747-ASB module processes RIO block transfer reads for
enabled logical devices.
Important: Reset, adapter reset and reset, adapter decide commands
are always ignored by the 1747-ASB module when any
of its logical devices are inhibited.
See page 7–2 for information regarding status codes.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Start-Up and Operation 6–5

The following table provides specific information concerning how


the inputs and outputs are handled during normal operation and when
communication exceptions occur. Notice that the hold last state
setting makes a difference in the control of the discrete outputs and
how the specialty I/O modules may operate.

1747ASB
1747 ASB Condition Specialty I/O Module Discrete All
Outputs SLC State➀ Outputs Inputs

Waiting for communications after powerup Not updated Test Cleared Read

Normal running Changing Run Changing Read


1747ASB module
Hold last state inhibited
Not updated Run Hold last state Read
selected➁ Loss of communications
Reset adapter decide
1747ASB module
Hold last state inhibited Not updated
selected or Loss of communications Test Cleared Read
not selected➂
Reset adapter decide Updated
Reset adapter reset commands received Updated Test Cleared Read

Major error➃ Not updated Program/Fault Cleared Not read

Minor error➄ Not updated Program/Fault Cleared Not read

Expansion chassis power loss Not updated Program/Fault Cleared Not read

➀ This is the 1747ASB module's operating mode, as compared to an SLC processor. For example,
if the SLC state is TEST, the 1747ASB module is controlling the specialty I/O modules in the
same manner as an SLC processor would in the test mode. Refer to the appropriate SLC
specialty I/O user's manual for more information.
➁ After the 1747ASB module enters the Run mode.
➂ Before the 1747ASB module enters the Run mode.
➃ This type of error is usually associated with the 1747ASB module. Refer to chapter 7 for more
information.
➄ This type of error is usually associated with a configuration error. Refer to chapter 7 for more
information.

Remote Expansion Chassis If power to any remote expansion chassis is lost, a 1747-ASB
Power Loss module error occurs. When power to the remote expansion chassis is
restored, the 1747-ASB module acts as if its own chassis power was
cycled and resets itself, restoring normal operation unless a major
fault occurred.

Invalid RIO Link Transfers The 1747-ASB module assigns each slot in the remote chassis and
remote expansion chassis a fixed amount of its image using slot
addressing. The 1747-ASB module then maps the I/O module’s
images to the portion of the 1747-ASB image that is assigned to their
slots.

If the I/O module in any slot is block transfer mapped, the 1747-ASB
module expects data for that I/O module to be transferred on the RIO
link using RIO block transfers. If the I/O module in any slot is
discretely mapped, the 1747-ASB expects data for that I/O module to
be transferred on the RIO link using RIO discrete transfers.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


6–6 Start-Up and Operation

An Invalid RIO link transfer occurs when the 1747-ASB module


receives data for a slot in a manner other than that for which the
1747-ASB module is expecting to receive data for that slot.

Invalid RIO link transfers are categorized below. Errors are not
generated by these conditions:
• RIO discrete or block transfers to empty or nonexistent slots
• RIO discrete transfers to block transfer slots
• RIO block transfers to discrete slots
• invalid length RIO block transfers

RIO Discrete or Block Transfers To Empty or Nonexistent


Chassis Slots

Discrete output image data received by the 1747-ASB module or


RIO block transfers to empty or nonexistent slots are ignored by the
1747-ASB module.

Discrete input image data sent by the 1747-ASB module for empty
or nonexistent slots are all zeros.

RIO Discrete Transfers To Block Transfer Chassis Slots

Discrete output image data received by the 1747-ASB module for a


block transfer slot is ignored by the 1747-ASB module.

Discrete input image data from the 1747-ASB module for block
transfer slots may be non-zero.

RIO Block Transfers To Discrete Chassis Slots

RIO block transfers to the 1747-ASB module for discrete slots are
ignored by the 1747-ASB module.

Important: Performing an RIO block transfer to a discrete chassis


slot which has an output module in it may cause outputs
on that module to turn on.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Start-Up and Operation 6–7

Invalid Length RIO Block Transfers

An invalid length RIO block transfer occurs when:


1. An RIO block transfer to an I/O module controlled by the
1747-ASB module is larger than the I/O module’s image size.
For example, if an eight word RIO block transfer is made to a I/O
module with an image size of four words, an invalid length RIO
block transfer has occurred.
2. An RIO block transfer write is made to a slot that contains a
module that only has input image.
3. An RIO block transfer read is made from a slot that contains a
module that only has output image.
4. Invalid length block transfers are ignored by the 1747-ASB
module.

Testing the 1747ASB Module The 1747-ASB module can be tested prior to beginning normal
operation by following the procedure provided below:
1. Install the 1747-ASB module and I/O modules into the remote
chassis, and if necessary, remote expansion chassis. Make sure
the PLC or SLC processor is in the program mode.
2. Apply power to all chassis.
3. After completing power up diagnostics, the 1747-ASB module
display appears as shown below:

ADAPTER
COMM FAULT

Green COMM LED is off. Red FAULT LED is off.

STATUS

Status display
indicates no RIO
communications
condition.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


6–8 Start-Up and Operation

4. Configure the PLC or SLC processor so that the scanner will


communicate on the RIO link with the 1747-ASB module. Place
the processor in the test mode. The 1747-ASB module display
appears as shown below:

Green COMM LED is flashing.


Status display ADAPTER
indicates a reset, COMM FAULT
adapter reset condition.

Red FAULT LED is off.

STATUS

Green COMM LED is flashing.

Status display
ADAPTER
indicates a reset, COMM FAULT
adapter decide
condition.

Red FAULT LED is off.

STATUS

When the 1747-ASB module is receiving reset, adapter reset or reset,


adapter decide commands, it:
• returns input data for all of its input modules and sends output
data to all of its specialty I/O modules. It does not turn any
discrete outputs on.
• processes all discrete and block transfers
• controls the specialty I/O modules in the same manner as an SLC
processor in TEST mode. How each specialty I/O module
responds to the TEST mode is specific to each specialty I/O
module. Refer to its user manual for more information.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Start-Up and Operation 6–9

I/O Module Installation and ATTENTION: I/O modules must not be inserted or
Removal Under Power removed when the remote chassis or remote expansion
! chassis is powered. Damage to the I/O module and/or
remote chassis or remote expansion chassis may result.

The following describes how the 1747-ASB module responds if an


I/O module is inserted or removed from a remote chassis or remote
expansion chassis when no 1747-ASB module error is present.➀

➀ Loss of power to the remote chassis or remote expansion chassis is considered a 1747ASB
module error. I/O modules can be inserted or removed from a remote expansion chassis that is
not powered, even if the remote chassis is powered. Each chassis has its own power supply.

I/O Module Insertion into a Slot

When an I/O module is inserted, a 1747-ASB module error occurs


and all discrete outputs under its control are cleared regardless of the
hold last state selection.

I/O Module Removal from a Scanned Slot

When an I/O module is removed from a slot being scanned by the


1747-ASB module, a 1747-ASB module error occurs and all discrete
outputs under its control are cleared regardless of the hold last state
selection.

Any I/O module that has input image and is mapped into the
1747-ASB module image, is always scanned by the 1747-ASB
module.

Any discrete I/O module or discretely mapped specialty I/O module


which is mapped into the 1747-ASB module image having only
output image, is scanned by the 1747-ASB module unless:
• The 1747-ASB module is not receiving communications from the
scanner.
• The 1747-ASB module is receiving reset, adapter decide
commands and the discrete outputs are being held in their last
state.
Any block transfer mapped specialty I/O module which is mapped
into the 1747-ASB image having only output image, is scanned by
the 1747-ASB module only when a block transfer write to the I/O
module occurs.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


6–10 Start-Up and Operation

I/O Module Removal from an Unscanned Slot

When an I/O module is removed from a slot not being scanned by


the 1747-ASB module, a 1747-ASB error does not occur and all
discrete outputs under its control are not affected.➀

Any I/O module not mapped into the 1747-ASB module image is
never scanned by the 1747-ASB module.

Any block transfer mapped specialty I/O module which is mapped


into the 1747-ASB image having only output image, is scanned by
the 1747-ASB module only when a block transfer write occurs.

➀ If an I/O module that is not being scanned is removed, no 1747ASB error occurs. However, a
1747ASB module error occurs the next time the 1747ASB module attempts to scan the I/O
module. For example, if an output module is removed while the 1747ASB module is holding
discrete outputs in their last state due to a loss of RIO link communications, a 1747ASB module
error occurs when RIO link communications are restored.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Chapter 7
Troubleshooting

This chapter presents status display information during operational


and fault conditions.

Troubleshooting Introduction The 1747-ASB module has two LEDs and a status display. These
LEDs and status display are used to indicate operating status and
error conditions while the module is operating.

Green COMM LED ADAPTER Red FAULT LED


COMM FAULT

Status Display
indicates a unique
alphanumeric pattern.
STATUS

There are two types of errors: major and minor. A major error is
indicated by a constant red Fault LED. This type of error is usually
associated with the 1747-ASB module. A minor error is indicated by
a flashing red Fault LED. This type of error is usually associated
with a configuration error.

Important: The 1747-ASB status displays are scanned one at a time


at a high rate of speed by the 1747-ASB module.
Visually it appears as if the displays are all on at the
same time. If the status display is flickering
pronouncedly, the signal integrity on the RIO link has
been compromised by environmental noise, improper
termination, and/or improper cable installation. This
compromise results in a drop in the scan rate of the
1747-ASB module displays.

Contacting AllenBradley If you need to contact Allen-Bradley for assistance, please have the
following information available when you call:
• Processor type, 1747-ASB series letter, and firmware (FRN)
number. See label on left side of processor and 1747-ASB
module.
• LED status and error codes
• hardware types in the system including I/O modules and chassis

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


7–2 Troubleshooting

Status Operating Codes.A for


Normal Operating Conditions
COMM FAULT Status
Operating Condition
LED LED Display

on off Normal RIO Communications

off off No RIO Communications ➀

off off Partial RIO Communications➁

Processor Lockout is Preventing RIO


off off
Communications ➀➂

flashing off Reset, Adapter Decide Commands ➀

flashing off Reset, Adapter Reset Commands

➀ When the 1747ASB module is holding outputs in their last state, the Status Display alternates
between the operating indication and HLS.
➁ Some, but not all of the 1747ASB module's logical devices are receiving RIO link
communications from the scanner. The 1747ASB module is returning valid input data to the
scanner, but is not turning outputs on or off.
➂ The 1747ASB module is locking the processor out while it is trying to communicate with all of the
1747ASB module's logical devices.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Troubleshooting 7–3

Error Operating Codes for


Error Conditions
COMM FAULT Status
Error Condition Corrective Action
LED LED Display
This appears for less than one second
off on Power Up Self Test in progress after power is applied. Replace the
1747ASB module if condition persists.
This occurs for several seconds after
Powerup OK. 1747ASB configuring
off on power is applied. Replace the
RIO image.
1747ASB module if condition persists.
Cycle power to reset the 1747ASB
Powerup Self Test Error (normal
off on module. If the problem persists, replace
operating mode)
the 1747ASB module.
Cycle power to reset the 1747ASB
off on Runtime RAM Fault module. If the problem persists, replace
the 1747ASB module.

Cycle power to reset the 1747ASB


off on or Watchdog Reset Detected ➀ module. If the problem persists, replace
the 1747ASB module.

Configuration Store Fault (EEPROM


failed write verification). The Cycle power to reset the 1747ASB
off on nonvolatile memory is not being module. If the problem persists, replace
written correctly when powering up in the 1747ASB module.
Save Mode.
Apply power to all remote expansion
Remote Power Fail (expansion
off flashing chassis. Check remote expansion cable
chassis powered down)
connections.
Bad Number of chassis (extra
off flashing Remove the extra chassis.
expansion chassis, 4 or more)
Invalid Starting Group (logical group
Select starting logical group 0 or 4
off flashing 2 or 6 selected with 1/2slot
(SW17,8).
addressing).
Check addressing mode selection
off flashing Undefined Addressing Mode
(SW35,6).
Check image size selection
1747ASB Module Image Size Too
(SW25,6,7,8). 16 logical groups is the
off flashing Large (above 2 logical racks for
maximum size when 2slot addressing is
2slot addressing)
selected.
Illegal logical Rack Address (8 or
Check the starting logical rack number
off flashing above in primary mode or 63 in
(SW11,2,3,4,5,6).
complementary mode).
Last Address Exceeded (image Check the starting logical rack number
crosses into logical rack 8 in primary (SW11,2,3,4,5,6), starting logical group
off flashing
mode or logical rack 63 in number (SW17,8), and image size
complementary mode) selection (SW25,6,7,8).
Check primary/complementary chassis
Last Chassis Not Allowed (when
off flashing selection (SW23), and the last chassis
primary mode is selected)
selection (SW34).

off flashing Invalid Baud Rate Check baud rate selection (SW21,2).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


7–4 Troubleshooting

COMM FAULT Status


Error Condition Corrective Action
LED LED Display
I/O Module Placement Error.➁ The
Check the addressing mode (SW35,6)
I/O module in slot# may have its
and the I/O module type installed in this
image overlapping the image of the
slot.
I/O module in its paired slot.
I/O Module Placement Error.➁ A 32
point module may be installed in Remove the 32 point module or change
off flashing Slot # slot# and 2slot addressing is the addressing mode (SW35,6).
selected.
Module in slot# has only part of its
Change 1747ASB module image size
image assigned to the 1747ASB
(SW25,6,7,8) or specialty mode
image (1/2slot addressing and
(SW39).
discrete mode only).
An Unsupported I/O Module is
off flashing Remove the unsupported I/O module.
Slot # installed in slot#.
DIP Switch Configuration
Mismatch.➂ The DIP switch values
Code 1 that were stored when the 1747ASB
Change the incorrect switch settings, or
off flashing and module was powered up in save
change to Save Mode.
mode (SW38) do not match the
Code 2 current settings now that the
1747ASB module is in check mode.
I/O Configuration Mismatch and
Location.➁➃ The I/O module
Code 3 configuration that was stored when
the 1747ASB module was powered Correct the I/O module configuration
off flashing and up in save mode (SW38) does not problem or change to the Save Mode.
match the configuration now that the
Slot #
1747ASB module is in check mode
due to a problem with slot#.
Configuration Read Fault (data in
EEPROM not valid). The Change to Save Mode and restore
off flashing configuration stored in nonvolatile power. Change back to Check Mode
memory is not valid when powering and restore power.
up in Check Mode.
Check the 1747ASB module's starting
Duplicate Adapter Address. There is logical rack number (SW11,2,3,4,5,6),
another adapter on the RIO link that and the 1747ASB module's starting
off flashing
has the same RIO address as the logical group number (SW17,8), and the
1747ASB module. 1747ASB module's image size
(SW25,6,7,8).

Code 4 Check the I/O module in slot#. Cycle


I/O Runtime Fault (Error, power to the 1747ASB module and the
off flashing and Location).➁➄ I/O module. If the condition persists,
replace the I/O module.
Slot #

Check jumper pins on bottom of


on on Module is in test mode. 1747ASB module. Make sure they are
not connected to anything.
➀ 8 indicates the 1747ASB module has encountered an unrecoverable fault.
➁ Slot # is a 2digit decimal slot number between 1 and 31. 31 indicates the offending slot could not
be detected.
➂ The Status Display alternates between these two codes. Code 1 is the incorrect parameter, Code
2 is the expected (saved) parameter`s value.
➃ The Status Display alternates between these two codes. Code 3 indicates a module configuration
mismatch.
➄ The Status Display alternates between these two codes. Code 4 indicates an I/O Error.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Troubleshooting 7–5

DIP Switch Configuration Mismatch Fault Codes - Codes 1 and 2

Code 1➀ Code 2➁ Meaning

Starting Logical Rack mismatch.


to 2digit decimal value previously saved is displayed
(rack 00 to rack 62).

or

Starting Logical Group mismatch.


or 1digit decimal value previously saved is displayed
(group 0, group 2, etc.).

or

or Baud Rate mismatch.


Baud rate previously saved is displayed. Abbreviated
values are used.
or

Primary/Complementary Selection mismatch. The


or
mode previously saved is displayed.

Image Size mismatch.


to Number of groups from 02 to 32 decimal indicates
previously saved selection.

Hold Last State (HLS) Selection mismatch. Yes or no


or indicates if the HLS was (yes) or was not (no) the
previously saved selection.

Processor Restart Lockout (PRL) Selection mismatch.


or Yes or no indicates if the PRL was (yes) or was not
(no) the previously saved selection.

Link Response Selection mismatch.


or Unrestricted (unr) or Restricted (rSd) indicates
previously saved selection.

or Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup mismatch.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


7–6 Troubleshooting

Code 1➀ Code 2➁ Meaning

or Addressing Mode mismatch.


1/2slot, 1slot, and 2slot indicates previously saved
selection.
or

Specialty I/O Mode mismatch.


or Discrete (dSc) or Block Transfer (bL) indicates
previously saved selection.

➀ C stands for configuration, the first number from the left is the DIP switch number (SW1, SW2, or
SW3). The second number stands for the highest individual switch number (1 - 8). C38 is switch
SW3, switch 8.
➁ This is the saved parameter setting.

I/O Module Configuration Mismatch Fault Codes - Code 3

Code 3 ➀ Meaning

I/O module missing from the previously saved configuration.

I/O module detected in an unused slot of the previously saved


configuration.
I/O Module Electrical Interface Type. Not the same as the saved
configuration such as a DC output module being placed in an AC output
slot.
I/O Module Mix or Class. Not the same as the saved configuration such
as a DC 16 point input module placed in an 8 point DC input slot.
➀ The fault code is alternated with the corresponding slot number (L slot#).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Troubleshooting 7–7

I/O Runtime Fault Codes - Code 4

Code 4 ➀ Meaning

I/O Parity Error

Hardware Parity Error or module installed or removed under power

I/O Module Removed Under Power

File Access Grant Timeout (specialty I/O only)

I/O Module Fault (generic)

through I/O Module Reported Error Code

I/O Module Reported Error Code Unknown

Module Inserted Under Power

➀ The fault code is alternated with the corresponding slot number (L slot#).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Chapter 8
Application Examples

This chapter presents two SLC 500 examples and one PLC-5/40
example. The application examples consist of:
• system overview
• device configuration
• processor image
• 1747-ASB module configuration details
• mapping details
• address label explanation
• application program excerpt

The following is a very basic SLC 500 remote I/O application


Basic SLC 500 Example - example. This application consists of an SLC 5/02 processor
Using an RIO Scanner controlling one local and one remote chassis of I/O.➀ The local I/O
resides in a 4-slot chassis, consisting of:
• 1746-OW8, 8 point AC/DC relay output module
• 1746-NIO4I, analog I/O combination module (2 current/voltage
inputs and 2 current outputs)
➀ An SLC 5/02 or greater processor is needed for the RIO scanner.

A RIO scanner, Catalog Number 1747-SN, resides in slot 3 of the


local chassis. The scanner controls one remote 7-slot chassis using
one 1747-ASB module.

The 1747-ASB module controls the following I/O modules:


• 1746-IA16, 16 point 100/120 VAC input module in slots one,
two, and three
• 1746-OA16, 16 point AC output module in slots four, five, and
six

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–2 Application Examples

The application is illustrated below. When the switch is closed,


bulbs 1 and 2 turn on and an analog signal is moved to analog
module output 1, which leads to the meter.

17461OW8
1746NIO4I

1746OA16
1746OA16
1746OA16
1746IA16
1746IA16
1746IA16
SLC 5/02

1747SN

ASB
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

The meter is connected Bulb 1 is connected


to output 1. The switch is connected Bulb 2 is connected to output 4.
to input 15. to output 12.

RIO Device Configuration

The 1747-ASB module is configured in the following manner.

Function 1747ASB Module 1


Starting logical rack number 0
Starting logical group number 0
Image size (number of logical groups) 6
Addressing mode 1slot
Specialty I/O mode➀ Discrete
Baud rate 230.4K
Last chassis Yes
Hold last state Yes
Processor restart lockout Yes
Link response➁ Switch position does not matter
Primary/complementary chassis Complementary
➀ The 1747SN Series A scanner cannot perform block transfers. Any specialty I/O modules
controlled by this scanner must be discretely mapped.
➁ Link response does not matter at 230.4K baud.

For more details on the 1747-SN RIO scanner, refer to the user
manual, publication 1747-6.6.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–3

The RIO scanner is configured for 230.4K baud. The SLC 5/02
G-file is configured as shown below:
1747ASB

Bit Number Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Logical Rack 3 Logical Rack 2 Logical Rack 1 Logical Rack 0

ÉÉ
Starting Group Starting Group Starting Group Starting Group
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0

ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
Starting Logical Group, Word 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Device Size, Word 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

Logical Rack 0 consists of one


logical device, beginning at Group 0.
The device size is six logical groups.

SLC Processor Image

Shown below are the SLC processor’s input and output image. The
SLC processor image is comprised of the local I/O module images
and the RIO scanner images. The RIO scanner image size is four
logical racks. The 1747-ASB module is in the RIO scanner image.

SLC Processor Input Image SLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0 Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

Local SLC Chassis OW8 O:1.0 Local SLC Chassis


NIO4I NIO4I I:2.0 & .1 NIO4I NIO4I O:2.0 & .1
Group 0 IA16 IA16 I:3.0 remote slot 1 Group 0 Not Used O:3.0 remote slot 1
Group 1 IA16 IA16 I:3.1 remote slot 2 Group 1 Not Used O:3.1 remote slot 2
Group 2 IA16 IA16 I:3.2 remote slot 3 Group 2 Not Used O:3.2 remote slot 3
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.3 remote slot 4 Logical Group 3 OA16 OA16 O:3.3 remote slot 4

Rack 0 Group 4 Not Used I:3.4 remote slot 5


Rack 0 Group 4 OA16 OA16 O:3.4 remote slot 5
Group 5 Not Used I:3.5 remote slot 6 Group 5 OA16 OA16 O:3.5 remote slot 6
Group 6 Not Used I:3.6 Group 6 Not Used O:3.6
Group 7 Not Used I:3.7 Group 7 Not Used O:3.7
Group 0 Not Used I:3.8 Group 0 Not Used O:3.8
Group 1 Not Used I:3.9 Group 1 Not Used O:3.9
Group 2 Not Used I:3.10 Group 2 Not Used O:3.10
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.11 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:3.11
Rack 1 Group 4 Not Used I:3.12 Rack 1 Group 4 Not Used O:3.12
Group 5 Not Used I:3.13 Group 5 Not Used O:3.13
Group 6 Not Used I:3.14 Scanner Image Group 6 Not Used O:3.14 Scanner Image
Group 7 Not Used I:3.15 Group 7 Not Used O:3.15
Group 0 Not Used I:3.16 Group 0 Not Used O:3.16
Group 1 Not Used I:3.17 Group 1 Not Used O:3.17
Group 2 Not Used I:3.18 Group 2 Not Used O:3.18
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.19 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:3.19
Rack 2 Group 4 Not Used I:3.20 Rack 2 Group 4 Not Used O:3.20
Group 5 Not Used I:3.21 Group 5 Not Used O:3.21
Group 6 Not Used I:3.22 Group 6 Not Used O:3.22
Group 7 Not Used I:3.23 Group 7 Not Used O:3.23
Group 0 Not Used I:3.24 Group 0 Not Used O:3.24
Group 1 Not Used I:3.25 Group 1 Not Used O:3.25
Group 2 Not Used I:3.26 Group 2 Not Used O:3.26
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.27 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:3.27
Rack 3 Group 4 Not Used I:3.28 Rack 3 Group 4 Not Used O:3.28
Group 5 Not Used I:3.29 Group 5 Not Used O:3.29
Group 6 Not Used I:3.30 Group 6 Not Used O:3.30
Group 7 Not Used I:3.31 Group 7 Not Used O:3.31
I = input image
O = output image
:3 = slot # RIO scanner uses in local SLC chassis
.x = scanner word

The default configuration size of the scanner image is 32 words.


You can specify that the SLC 5/02 processor scan is less than 32
words with your programming device.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–4 Application Examples

1747ASB Module Configuration Details

The entire image of the 1747-ASB module is contained in logical


rack 0. It does not cross a logical rack boundary. Therefore, it
appears as one logical device to the scanner.

SLC Processor Input Image SLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0 Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

Local SLC Chassis OW8 O:1.0 Local SLC Chassis


NIO4I NIO4I I:2.0 & .1 NIO4I NIO4I O:2.0 & .1
Group 0 IA16 IA16 I:3.0 remote slot 1 Group 0 Not Used O:3.0 remote slot 1
Group 1 IA16 IA16 I:3.1 remote slot 2 Group 1 Not Used O:3.1 remote slot 2
Group 2 IA16 IA16 I:3.2 remote slot 3 Group 2 Not Used O:3.2 remote slot 3
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.3 remote slot 4 Logical Group 3 OA16 OA16 O:3.3 remote slot 4

Rack 0 Group 4 Not Used I:3.4 remote slot 5


Rack 0 Group 4 OA16 OA16 O:3.4 remote slot 5
Group 5 Not Used I:3.5 remote slot 6 Group 5 OA16 OA16 O:3.5 remote slot 6
Group 6 Not Used I:3.6 Group 6 Not Used O:3.6
Group 7 Not Used I:3.7 Scanner Image Group 7 Not Used O:3.7 Scanner Image

The 1747-ASB module is configured as the last chassis because it


uses the highest numbered logical group in the highest logical rack it
resides in.

The 1747-ASB module is configured for hold last state and processor
restart lockout. If the RIO communications cable is removed and
reconnected during normal RIO communications, the discrete
outputs remain in their last state and the 1747-ASB module does not
resume communicating with the scanner, until the processor restart
lockout terminals are momentarily shorted together. For more
information regarding processor restart lockout, refer to chapter 4.

The 1747-ASB module is configured as a complementary chassis.


Because complementary I/O is not being used, there is no need for a
primary chassis.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–5

1747ASB Module I/O Mapping Details

The 1747-ASB module is configured for 1-slot addressing. Its image


starts at group 0 of logical rack 0 and is sized for six logical groups.
There are six 16 bit words of input and output image for its three 16
point input and output modules.

Three input and output image words are not used. However, when
using 16 point I/O, 1-slot addressing provides I/O configuration
flexibility. The modules can be inserted into any slot, in any order.

Slots 1, 2, and 3 contain 16 point input modules. The output words


assigned to these slots are unused.

Slots 4, 5, and 6 contain 16 point output modules. The input words


assigned to these slots are unused.

SLC Processor Input Image SLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0 Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

Local SLC Chassis OW8 O:1.0


NIO4I NIO4I I:2.0 & .1 NIO4I NIO4I O:2.0
Group 0 IA16 IA16 I:3.0 remote slot 1 Group 0 Not Used O:3.0
Group 1 IA16 IA16 I:3.1 remote slot 2 Group 1 Not Used O:3.1
Group 2 IA16 IA16 I:3.2 remote slot 3 Group 2 Not Used O:3.2
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.3 remote slot 4 Logical Group 3 OA16 OA16 O:3.3
Rack 0 Group 4 Not Used I:3.4 remote slot 5
Rack 0 Group 4 OA16 OA16 O:3.4
Group 5 Not Used I:3.5 remote slot 6 Group 5 OA16 OA16 O:3.5
Group 6
Group 7
Not Used
Not Used
I:3.6
I:3.7
Scanner Image Group 6
Group 7
Not Used
Not Used
O:3.6
O:3.7

RIO Address Label Examples

Due to the 1747-ASB module’s addressing modes and RIO link


operation, the I/O modules controlled by the 1747-ASB module are
addressed by the SLC processor based on the slot location of the SN
and the word that the I/O module uses in the SN image. A label kit
is included with each 1747-ASB module to assist you in addressing
I/O modules.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–6 Application Examples

Shown below are examples of how the labels are filled out.

1746NIO4I

1746OA16
1746OA16
1746OA16
1746OW8

1746IA16
1746IA16
1746IA16
SLC 5/02

1747SN

ASB
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

The meter is connected The switch is connected Bulb 2 is connected Bulb 1 is connected
to output 1. to input 15. to output 12. to output 4.
0-7 n 8 - 15 n 0-7 n 8 - 15 n 0-7 n 8 - 15 n
SN Slot 3 SN Slot 3 SN Slot 3
SN Word(s) 0 SN Word(s) 3 SN Word(s) 4

BT Discrete n BT Discrete n BT Discrete n


Remote SLC System Remote SLC System Remote SLC System

The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are checked The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are checked The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are
because the module requires more than because the module requires more checked because the module
one byte of image. than one byte of image. requires more than one byte of
image.
The SN Slot is 3 because that is the slot The SN Slot is 3 because that is the
the scanner occupies in the local SLC slot the scanner occupies in the local The SN Slot is 3 because that is the
chassis. SLC chassis. slot the scanner occupies in the local
SLC chassis.
The SN Word is 0 because it is the SN The SN Word is 3 because it is the
image word assigned to the IA16. These SN image word assigned to the The SN Word is 4 because it is the
values are determined by converting the OA16. The value is determined by SN image word assigned to the
module's logical rack and logical group converting the module's logical rack OA16. These values are determined
numbers (logical rack 0, G0) to the and logical group numbers (logical by converting the module's logical
corresponding SN words. rack 0, G3) to the corresponding SN rack and logical group numbers
word. (logical rack 0, G4) to the
corresponding SN word.

Application Example Program

Shown below is an excerpt from the user program. When the switch
is closed, bulbs 1 and 2 turn on and the decimal value 5555 is moved
to analog output 1 and is converted to an analog signal.

I:3.0 MOV
] [ MOVE
15 Source 5555
Switch
Dest O:2.1

Meter

O:3.4
( )
4
Bulb 1

O:3.3
( )
12
Bulb 2

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–7

SLC 500 Example - Using an This application consists of an SLC 5/02 processor controlling local
RIO Scanner and remote I/O.➀ The local I/O resides in a 4-slot chassis, consisting
of:
• 1746-OW8, 8 point AC/DC relay output module
• 1746-IA8, 8 point AC input module
➀ An SLC 5/02 or greater processor is needed for the RIO scanner.

An RIO scanner, Catalog Number 1747-SN, resides in slot 3 of the


local chassis. The scanner controls two remote expansion chassis
(one 7-slot and one 4-slot) and a RediPANEL.

1747-ASB module 1 controls the following I/O modules:


• 1746-NIO4I, analog module (2 current/voltage inputs and 2
current outputs)
• 1746-IV32, 32 point 24VDC sourcing input module
• 1746-OV32, 32 point 24VDC sinking output module
• 1746-OB16, 16 point DC sourcing output module
• 1746-OA16, 16 point AC output module
1747-ASB module 2 controls the following I/O modules:
• 1746-OA8, 8 point AC output module
• 1746-IO12, 6 point input/output module
• 1746-IA16, 16 point AC input module
The application is illustrated below. When the switch is closed,
bulbs 1 and 2 turn on and an analog signal is moved to analog
module output 1, which leads to the meter.
17460NIO4I

1746OV32
1746OB16
1746OA16
1746OW8

1746IO12
1746IV32

1746IA16
1746OA8
SLC 5/02

1746IA8
1747SN

EMPTY
ASB 1

ASB 2

RediPANEL

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3

The meter is connected


to output 1. The switch is connected Bulb 2 is connected Bulb 1 is connected
to input 17. to output 12. to output 4.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–8 Application Examples

RIO Device Configuration

The 1747-ASB modules and RediPANEL are configured in the


following manner.

1747ASB 1747ASB
Function RediPANEL➀
Module 1 Module 2
Starting logical rack number 1 0 2
Starting logical group number 6 0 4
Image size (number of logical
6 2 4
groups)
Addressing mode 1slot 2slot Not applicable
Specialty I/O mode➁ Discrete Discrete Not applicable
Baud rate 230.4K 230.4K 230.4K
Last chassis No Yes Yes
Hold last state Yes No Not applicable
Processor restart lockout Yes No Not applicable
Switch position Switch position
Link response➂ Not applicable
does not matter does not matter
Primary/complementary chassis Complementary Complementary Not applicable
➀ The only part of the RediPANEL configuration that is important is the RIO address and baud rate.
➁ The 1747SN Series A scanner cannot perform block transfers. Any specialty I/O modules
controlled by this scanner must be discretely mapped.
➂ Link response does not matter at 230.4K baud.

For more details on the 1747-SN RIO scanner, refer to the user
manual.

The RIO scanner is configured for 230.4K baud. The SLC 5/02
G-file is configured as shown below:
RediPANEL 1747ASB #1 1747ASB #2

Bit Number Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Logical Rack 3 Logical Rack 2 Logical Rack 1 Logical Rack 0

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÇÇ ÉÉ
Starting Group Starting Group Starting Group Starting Group
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÇÇ ÉÉ
Starting Logical Group, Word 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Device Size, Word 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Logical Rack 2 consists of two Logical Rack 1 Logical Rack 0


logical devices. The first one consists of one consists of one
begins at Group 0. The device logical device, logical device,
size is four logical groups. The beginning at Group beginning at Group
second one begins at Group 4. 6. The device size 0. The device size
The device size is four logical is two logical is two logical
groups. groups. groups.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–9

SLC Processor Image

Shown below are the SLC processor’s input and output image. The
SLC processor image is comprised of the local I/O module images
and the RIO scanner images. The RIO scanner image size is four
logical racks. 1747-ASB module 1, 1747-ASB module 2, and the
RediPANEL are in the RIO scanner image.

SLC Processor Input Image SLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0 Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

IA8 I:2.0
Local SLC Chassis OW8 O:1.0
Group 0 IO12 I:3.0
1747ASB Module 2 Group 0 IO12 OA8 O:3.0
Group 1 IA16 IA16 I:3.1 Group 1 O:3.1
Group 2 Not Used I:3.2 Group 2 Not Used O:3.2
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.3 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:3.3
Rack 0 Group 4 Not Used I:3.4 Rack 0 Group 4 Not Used O:3.4
Group 5 Not Used I:3.5 Group 5 Not Used O:3.5
Group 6 Not Used I:3.6 Group 6 Not Used O:3.6
Group 7 Not Used I:3.7 Group 7 Not Used O:3.7
Group 0 Not Used I:3.8
Scanner Image Group 0 Not Used O:3.8
Group 1 Not Used I:3.9 Group 1 Not Used O:3.9
Group 2 Not Used I:3.10 Group 2 Not Used O:3.10
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.11 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:3.11

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Rack 1 Group 4 Not Used I:3.12 Rack 1 Group 4 Not Used O:3.12
Group 5 Not Used I:3.13 Group 5 Not Used O:3.13

ÉÉÉ
É ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
Group 6 NIO4I NIO4I I:3.14 Group 6 NIO4I NIO4I O:3.14
Group 7 NIO4I NIO4I I:3.15 Group 7 NIO4I NIO4I O:3.15
IV32 IV32 OV32 OV32

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 0 I:3.16 Group 0 O:3.16
Group 1 IV32 IV32 I:3.17 1747ASB Module 1 Group 1 OV32 OV32 O:3.17
Group 2 I:3.18 Group 2 OB16 OB16 O:3.18
Logical Group 3 I:3.19 Logical Group 3 OA16 OA16 O:3.19
Rack 2 Group 4 I:3.20 Rack 2 Group 4 O:3.20
Group 5
Group 6
I:3.21
I:3.22
RediPANEL Group 5
Group 6
O:3.21
O:3.22
Group 7 I:3.23 Group 7 O:3.23
Group 0 Not Used I:3.24 Group 0 Not Used O:3.24
Group 1 Not Used I:3.25 Group 1 Not Used O:3.25
Group 2 Not Used I:3.26 Group 2 Not Used O:3.26
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.27 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:3.27
Rack 3 Group 4 Not Used I:3.28 Rack 3 Group 4 Not Used O:3.28
Group 5 Not Used I:3.29 Group 5 Not Used O:3.29
Group 6 Not Used I:3.30 Group 6 Not Used O:3.30
Group 7 Not Used I:3.31 Group 7 Not Used O:3.31

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–10 Application Examples

1747ASB Module 1 Configuration Details

Because 1747-ASB module 1’s image crosses the logical rack


boundary of racks 1 and 2, 1747-ASB module 1 appears as two
logical devices to the RIO scanner.

SLC Processor Input Image SLC Processor Output Image

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0 Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

Logical NIO4I NIO4I Logical NIO4I NIO4I

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
Group 6 I:3.14 Group 6 O:3.14
Rack 1 Group 7 NIO4I NIO4I I:3.15 Rack 1 Group 7 NIO4I NIO4I O:3.15
Group 0 IV32 IV32 I:3.16 Group 0 OV32 OV32 O:3.16

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 1 IV32 IV32 I:3.17 1747ASB Group 1 OV32 OV32 O:3.17 1747ASB
Group 2 I:3.18 Module 1 Group 2 OB16 OB16 O:3.18 Module 1
Logical Group 3 I:3.19 Logical Group 3 OA16 OA16 O:3.19
Rack 2 Group 4 I:3.20 Rack 2 Group 4 O:3.20
Group 5 I:3.21
RediPANEL Group 5 O:3.21 RediPANEL
Group 6 I:3.22 Group 6 O:3.22
Group 7 I:3.23 Group 7 O:3.23

1747-ASB module 1 is not configured as the last chassis because the


highest numbered logical group it uses (Group 3) is not the highest
numbered logical group in the highest logical rack it resides in. The
RediPANEL uses the highest numbered logical group (Group 7) in
logical rack 2.

1747-ASB module 1 is configured for hold last state and processor


restart lockout. If the RIO communications cable is removed and
reconnected during normal RIO communications, the discrete
outputs remain in their last state and the 1747-ASB module does not
resume communicating with the scanner, until the processor restart
lockout terminals are momentarily shorted together. For more
information regarding processor restart lockout, refer to chapter 4.

1747-ASB module 1 is configured as a complementary chassis.


Because complementary I/O is not being used, there is no need for a
primary chassis.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–11

1747ASB Module 2 Configuration Details

Because 1747-ASB module 2’s image does not cross the logical rack
boundary, 1747-ASB module 2 appears as one logical device to the
scanner.

SLC Processor Input Image SLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0 Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

Group 0 IO12 I:3.0


1747ASB Group 0 IO12 OA8 O:3.0
1747ASB
Group 1 IA16 IA16 I:3.1 Group 1 O:3.1
Group 2 Not Used I:3.2
Module 2 Group 2 Not Used O:3.2
Module 2
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.3 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:3.3
Rack 0 Group 4 Not Used I:3.4 Rack 0 Group 4 Not Used O:3.4
Group 5 Not Used I:3.5 Group 5 Not Used O:3.5
Group 6 Not Used I:3.6 Group 6 Not Used O:3.6
Group 7 Not Used I:3.7 Group 7 Not Used O:3.7

1747-ASB module 2 is configured as last chassis because it has the


highest numbered logical group (group 1) in the highest numbered
logical rack (rack 0).

1747-ASB module 2 is not configured for hold last state and


processor restart lockout. If the RIO communications cable is
removed and reconnected during normal RIO communications, the
discrete outputs are reset and the 1747-ASB module automatically
resumes communicating with the scanner.

1747-ASB module 2 is configured as a complementary chassis.


Because complementary I/O is not being used, there is no need for a
primary chassis.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–12 Application Examples

1747ASB Module 1 I/O Mapping Details

Because 1747-ASB module 1 is configured for 1-slot addressing, has


six logical groups and six slots available for I/O, all of the slots
present are mapped into the scanner image. No extra slots in the
chassis, or extra words in the image remain.

Because the specialty I/O mode chosen is discrete mode and the
1747-ASB module is configured for 1-slot addressing, all specialty
modules that have two words or less of input and output image are
discretely mapped.

The 1746-NIO4I module requires two input and two output words.
Therefore, it is discretely mapped. When 1-slot addressing is
selected, two words of input image and two words of output image
are available for each slot pair. Because it requires both words of the
input and output image, slot 2 must remain empty. If an I/O module
is inserted into slot 2, a 1747-ASB module error occurs.

Due to slot pairing, two 32 point modules that have opposite


functions (one input and one output), are allowed in one slot pair
using 1-slot addressing. The 32 point input module, Catalog Number
1746-IV32, installed in slot 3 uses the input image words assigned to
slots 3 and 4. No input image is available for slot 4. Slot 4 can use
the output image that slot 3 is not using. Therefore, a 32 point output
module, Catalog Number 1746-OV32 uses the output image assigned
to slots 3 and 4.

Slots 5 and 6 contain 16 point output modules. The input words


assigned to these slots are not used.

SLC Processor Input Image SLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0 Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
Group 6 NIO4I NIO4I I:3.14 Group 6 NIO4I NIO4I O:3.14
Group 7 NIO4I NIO4I I:3.15 Group 7 NIO4I NIO4I O:3.15
IV32 IV32 OV32 OV32

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 0 I:3.16 Group 0 O:3.16
Group 1 IV32 IV32 I:3.17 1747ASB Group 1 OV32 OV32 O:3.17 1747ASB
Group 2 I:3.18 Module 1 Group 2 OB16 OB16 O:3.18 Module 1
Logical Group 3 I:3.19 Logical Group 3 OA16 OA16 O:3.19
Rack 2 Group 4 I:3.20 Rack 2 Group 4 O:3.20
Group 5
Group 6
I:3.21
I:3.22
RediPANEL Group 5
Group 6
O:3.21
O:3.22
RediPANEL
Group 7 I:3.23 Group 7 O:3.23

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–13

1747ASB Module 2 I/O Mapping Details

Because 1747-ASB module 2 is configured for 2-slot addressing, has


two logical groups and three slots available for I/O, all of the slots
present are mapped into the scanner image. One extra byte of input
and output image remain unassigned to any slot because there is no
slot 4 in the chassis. Due to slot pairing, slot 3 can use the extra
image space.

Because the specialty I/O mode chosen is discrete mode and the
1747-ASB module is configured for 2-slot addressing, all specialty
modules having one word or less of input and output image are
discretely mapped.

Slot 1 contains an 8 point output module, Catalog Number


1746-OA8, that uses the output image assigned to slot 1. The input
image assigned to slot 1 is unused. Slot 2 contains a combination
module, Catalog Number 1746-IO12 that uses the input and output
byte assigned to slot 2.

Because there is no slot 4, the image assigned to slot 4 can be used


by slot 3. A 16 point input module, Catalog Number 1746-IA16 is
installed in slot 3, using the input images assigned to slots 3 and 4.
The output image for slots 3 and 4 is not used.

SLC Processor Input Image SLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0 Bit Number (Decimal) 15 8 7 0

Group 0 IO12 I:3.0


1747ASB Group 0 IO12 OA8 O:3.0
1747ASB
Group 1 IA16 IA16 I:3.1 Group 1
Group 2 Not Used I:3.2
Module 2 Group 2 Not Used
O:3.1
O:3.2
Module 2
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:3.3 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:3.3
Rack 0 Group 4 Not Used I:3.4
Rack 0 Group 4 Not Used O:3.4
Group 5 Not Used I:3.5 Group 5 Not Used O:3.5
Group 6 Not Used I:3.6 Group 6 Not Used O:3.6
Group 7 Not Used I:3.7 Group 7 Not Used O:3.7
Group 0 Not Used I:3.8 Group 0 Not Used O:3.8

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–14 Application Examples

RIO Address Label Examples

Due to the 1747-ASB module’s addressing modes and RIO link


operation, the I/O modules controlled by the 1747-ASB module are
addressed by the SLC processor based on the slot location of the SN
and the word that the I/O module uses in the SN image. A label kit
is included with each 1747-ASB module to assist you in addressing
I/O modules.

Shown below are examples of how the labels are filled out.

1746NIO4I

1746OV32
1746OB16
1746OA16
1746OW8

1746IO12
1746IV32

1746IA16
1746OA8
SLC 5/02

1746IA8
1747SN

EMPTY
ASB 1

ASB 2
RediPANEL

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3

The meter is connected The switch is connected Bulb 2 is connected Bulb 1 is connected
to output 1. to input 17. to output 12. to output 4.
0-7 n 8 - 15 n 0-7 n 8 - 15 n 0-7 n 8 - 15 n 0-7 8 - 15 n
SN Slot 3 SN Slot 3 SN Slot 3 SN Slot 3
SN Word(s) 14, 15 SN Word(s) 16, 17 SN Word(s) 19 SN Word(s) 0

BT Discrete n BT Discrete n BT Discrete n BT Discrete n


Remote SLC System Remote SLC System Remote SLC System Remote SLC System

The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are The 8-15 box is checked
checked because the module checked because the module checked because the module because the module requires
requires more than one byte of requires more than one byte of requires more than one byte of the most significant byte of
image. image. Bits 16-31 must be image. image. Bits 0-7 must be
converted to bits 0-15 in the SN converted to bits 8-15 in the
The SN Slot is 3 because that is image, and the next word (word 17) The SN Slot is 3 because that is SN image.➁
the slot the scanner occupies in used for the I/O reference. ➀ the slot the scanner occupies in
the local SLC chassis. the local SLC chassis. The SN Slot is 3 because that
The SN Slot is 3 because that is is the slot the scanner
The SN Words are 14, 15 the slot the scanner occupies in the The SN Word is 19 because it is occupies in the local SLC
because they are the SN image local SLC chassis. the SN image word assigned to chassis.
words assigned to the NIO4I. the OA16. The value is
These values are determined by The SN Words are 16, 17 because determined by converting the The SN Word is 0 because it is
converting the module's logical they are the SN image words module's logical rack and logical the SN image word assigned to
rack and logical group numbers assigned to the IV32. These group numbers (logical rack 2, G3) the IO12. These values are
(logical rack 1, G6, G7) to the values are determined by to the corresponding SN word. determined by converting the
corresponding SN words. converting the module's logical rack module's logical rack and
and logical group numbers (logical logical group numbers (logical
rack 2, GO, G1) to the rack 0, G0) to the
corresponding SN words. corresponding SN word.

➀ Input bits 16-31 must be converted to 0-15 by subtracting 16. Therefore, Input bit 17 is converted
to 1.
➁ Input and Output bits 0-7 must be converted to 8-15 by adding 8. Therefore, Input bit 4 is
converted to 12.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–15

Application Example Program

Shown below is an excerpt from the user program. When the switch
is closed, bulbs 1 and 2 turn on and the decimal value 5555 is moved
to analog output 1 and is converted to an analog signal.

I:3.17 MOV
] [ MOVE
1 Source 5555
Switch➀
Dest O:3.15

Meter

O:3.0
( )
12
Bulb 1➁

O:3.19
( )
12
Bulb 2

➀ Input bits 16-31 must be converted to 0-15 by subtracting 16. Therefore, Input bit 17 is converted
to 1.
➁ Input and Output bits 0-7 must be converted to 8-15 by adding 8. Therefore, Input bit 12 is
converted to 4.

The following is another representation of what is discussed above.


1746NIO4I

1746OV32
1746OB16
1746OA16
1746OW8

1746IO12
1746IV32

1746IA16
1746OA8
SLC 5/02

1746IA8
1747SN

EMPTY
ASB 1

ASB 2

RediPANEL

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3

The meter is connected


to output 1. The switch is connected Bulb 2 is connected Bulb 1 is connected
to input 17. to output 12. to output 4.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–16 Application Examples

PLC5 Example This application consists of a PLC-5/40 processor controlling local


and remote I/O.

The PLC-5/40 built-in scanner controls two 1747-ASB modules.


1747-ASB module 1 controls a 7-slot and 10-slot chassis. The I/O
modules residing in those chassis are:
• 1746-NIO4V, analog module (2 current or voltage inputs and 2
voltage outputs)
• 1746-OW8, 8 point AC/DC Relay output module
• 1746-OW16, 16 point AC/DC Relay output module
• 1746-IA16, 16 point AC input module
• 1746-OG16, 16 point TTL output module
• 1746-IG16, 16 point TTL input module
• 1746-OW8, 8 point AC/DC Relay output module
• 1746-OV8, 8 point DC sinking output module
• 1746-OB16, 16 point DC sourcing output module
• 1746-IB16, 16 point DC sinking input module
• 1746-OA8, 8 point AC output module
• 1746-NO4V, analog module (4 voltage outputs)
• 1746-OW16, 16 point AC/DC Relay output module
• 1746-IA16, 16 point AC input module
• 1746-OV16, 16 point DC sinking output module
• 1746-IV16, 16 point DC sourcing input module
1747-ASB module 2 controls a 4-slot chassis. The I/O modules
residing in the SLC chassis are:
• 1746-NI4, analog module (4 current inputs)
• 1746-NO4I, analog module (4 current outputs)
• 1746-NIO4I, analog module (2 current or voltage inputs and 2
current outputs)
The application is illustrated on the following page. When the
switch is closed, the bulb turns on. An analog signal is sent from the
1746-NIO4I module to meter 1 and a voltage signal is sent from the
1746-NO4V module to meter 2.

For more information regarding the PLC-5/40 processor, refer to the


installation manual.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–17

1746-NIO4V

1746-OW16

1746-OW16
1746-NO4V
1746-OG16

1746-NIO4I
1746-OB16

1746-OV16

1746-NO4I
1746-OW8

1746-OW8
1746-IG16
1746-IA16

1746-IB16

1746-IA16

1746-IV16
1746-OV8

1746-OA8

1746-NI4
ASB 1

ASB 2
PLC5/40

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 1 2 3

The switch is connected The bulb is connected Meter 2 is connected Meter 1 is connected
to input 12. to output 5. to output 2. to output 0.

Important: All bit numbers in this example are in octal. The 1746
16 and 32 point modules must have their LED numbers
and wiring terminal numbers labeled in octal. All
Series C or later modules include an octal conversion
kit which allows you to convert from decimal to octal.
This kit is also available as a replacement part through
your Allen-Bradley distributor.

RIO Device Configuration

The 1747-ASB modules are configured in the following manner.

Function 1747ASB Module 1 1747ASB Module 2


Starting logical rack number 1 3
Starting logical group number 6 0
Image size (number of logical groups) 8 6
Addressing mode 2slot 1/2slot
Specialty I/O mode Block transfer➀ Discrete
Baud rate 57.6K 57.6K
Last chassis Yes Yes
Hold last state Yes No
Processor restart lockout Yes No
Link response Unrestricted Unrestricted
Primary/complementary chassis Complementary Complementary
➀ When block transfer mode is selected, all specialty I/O modules are block transfer mapped. Their
data is exchanged on the RIO link using RIO block transfers.

The 1771 chassis is configured for 1-slot addressing. The PLC-5/40


is configured for scanner mode operation at 57.6K baud.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–18 Application Examples

PLC Processor Image

Because the 4-slot local chassis is configured for 1-slot addressing,


the first four logical groups of logical rack 0 are used for local I/O,
the remaining four groups are not used.

Logical racks 1, 2, and 3 are available for remote I/O because they
are not used by the local chassis.

PLC Processor Input Image PLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number − Octal 17 10 7 0 Bit Number − Octal 17 10 7 0

Group 0 I:000 Group 0 O:000


Group 1 I:001 Group 1 O:001
Group 2 I:002 Group 2 O:002
Logical Group 3 I:003 Logical Group 3 O:003
Local I/O Local I/O
Rack 0 Group 4 I:004 Rack 0 Group 4 O:004
Group 5 I:005 Group 5 O:005
Group 6 I:006 Group 6 O:006
Group 7 I:007 Group 7 O:007
Group 0 Not Used I:010 Group 0 Not Used O:010
Group 1 Not Used I:011 Group 1 Not Used O:011
Group 2 Not Used I:012 Group 2 Not Used O:012
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:013 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:013
Rack 1 Group 4 Not Used I:014 Rack 1 Group 4 Not Used O:014
Not Used Not Used

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Group 5 I:015 Group 5 O:015
Group 6 NIO4V I:016 Group 6 OW8 NIO4V O:016
Group 7 IA16 IA16 I:017 Group 7 OW16 OW16 O:017

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Group 0 IG16 IG16 I:020 Group 0 OG16 OG16 O:020
Group 1 I:021 Group 1 OV8 OW8 O:021
1747ASB 1747ASB

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Group 2 IB16 IB16 I:022 Group 2 OB16 OB16 O:022
Logical Group 3 NO4V I:023 Module 1 Logical Group 3 NO4V OA8 O:023 Module 1
Rack 2 Group 4 IA16 IA16 I:024 Rack 2 Group 4 OW16 OW16 O:024
Group 5 IV16 IV16 I:025 Group 5 OV16 OV16 O:025
Group 6 Not Used I:026 Group 6 Not Used O:026
Group 7 Not Used I:027 Group 7 Not Used O:027
Group 0 NI4 NI4 I:030 Group 0 NO4I NO4I O:030
Group 1 NI4 NI4 I:031 Group 1 NO4I NO4I O:031
Group 2 NI4 NI4 I:032 Group 2 NO4I NO4I O:032
Logical Group 3 NI4 NI4 I:033 1747ASB Logical Group 3 NO4I NO4I O:033 1747ASB
Rack 3 Group 4 NIO4I NIO4I I:034 Module 2 Rack 3 Group 4 NIO4I NIO4I O:034 Module 2
Group 5 NIO4I NIO4I I:035 Group 5 NIO4I NIO4I O:035
Group 6 Not Used I:036 Group 6 Not Used O:036
Group 7 Not Used I:037 Group 7 Not Used O:037

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–19

1747ASB Module 1 Configuration Details

Because the image of the 1747-ASB module 1 crosses logical rack


boundary 1 and 2, 1747-ASB module 1 appears as two logical
devices to the RIO scanner.

PLC Processor Input Image PLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number − Octal 17 10 7 0 Bit Number − Octal 17 10 7 0

Group 0 Not Used I:010 Group 0 Not Used O:010


Group 1 Not Used I:011 Group 1 Not Used O:011
Group 2 Not Used I:012 Group 2 Not Used O:012
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:013 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:013
Rack 1 Group 4 Not Used I:014 Rack 1 Group 4 Not Used O:014

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Group 5 Not Used I:015 Group 5 Not Used O:015
Group 6 NIO4V I:016 Group 6 OW8 NIO4V O:016
IA16 IA16 OW16 OW16

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Group 7 I:017 Group 7 O:017
Group 0 IG16 IG16 I:020 Group 0 OG16 OG16 O:020
Group 1 Group 1 OV8 OW8

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
I:021 O:021
Group 2 IB16 IB16 I:022 1747ASB Group 2 OB16 OB16 O:022 1747ASB
Logical Group 3 NO4V I:023 Module 1 Logical Group 3 NO4V OA8 O:023 Module 1
Rack 2 Group 4 IA16 IA16 I:024 Rack 2 Group 4 OW16 OW16 O:024
Group 5 IV16 IV16 I:025 Group 5 OV16 OV16 O:025
Group 6 Not Used I:026 Group 6 Not Used O:026
Group 7 Not Used I:027 Group 7 Not Used O:027

1747-ASB module 1 is configured for last chassis because it has the


highest numbered logical group (group 5) in its highest numbered
logical rack (logical rack 2).

1747-ASB module 1 is configured for hold last state and processor


restart lockout. If the RIO communications cable is removed and
reconnected during normal RIO communications, the discrete
outputs remain in their last state and the 1747-ASB module does not
resume communicating with the scanner until the processor restart
lockout terminals are momentarily shorted together. For more
information regarding processor restart lockout, refer to chapter 4.

1747-ASB module 1 is configured as a complementary chassis.


Because complementary I/O is not being used, there is no need for a
primary chassis.

The 1747-ASB module 1 response time is unrestricted because the


PLC-5/40 does not require a restricted response time.

Important: Selecting processor restart lockout disables PLC auto


configurations on the 1747-ASB module except for
initial powerup. If processor restart lockout is not
selected, you are able to perform PLC auto
configurations on the 1747-ASB module.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–20 Application Examples

1747ASB Module 2 Configuration Details

Because the image of 1747-ASB module 2 does not cross a logical


rack boundary, 1747-ASB module 2 appears as one logical device to
the scanner.

PLC Processor Input Image PLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number − Octal 17 10 7 0 Bit Number − Octal 17 10 7 0

Group 0 NI4 NI4 I:030 Group 0 NO4I NO4I O:030


Group 1 NI4 NI4 I:031 Group 1 NO4I NO4I O:031
Group 2 NI4 NI4 I:032 Group 2 NO4I NO4I O:032
Logical Group 3 NI4 NI4 I:033 1747ASB Logical Group 3 NO4I NO4I O:033 1747ASB
Rack 3 Group 4 NIO4I NIO4I I:034 Module 2 Rack 3 Group 4 NIO4I NIO4I O:034 Module 2
Group 5 NIO4I NIO4I I:035 Group 5 NIO4I NIO4I O:035
Group 6 Not Used I:036 Group 6 Not Used O:036
Group 7 Not Used I:037 Group 7 Not Used O:037

1747-ASB module 2 is configured for last chassis because it has the


highest logical group (group 5) in its highest numbered logical rack
(logical rack 3).

1747-ASB module 2 is not configured for hold last state and


processor restart lockout. If the RIO communications cable is
removed and reconnected during normal RIO communications, the
discrete outputs are reset and the 1747-ASB module automatically
resumes communicating with the PLC-5/40.

1747-ASB module 2 is configured as a complementary chassis.


Because complementary I/O is not being used, there is no need for a
primary chassis.

The 1747-ASB module 2 response time is unrestricted because the


PLC-5/40 does not require a restricted response time.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–21

1747ASB Module 1 I/O Mapping Details

Because 1747-ASB module 1 is configured for 2-slot addressing, has


eight logical groups and 16 I/O slots available, all of the slots present
are mapped into the PLC-5/40 image. No extra slots in the chassis or
extra words in the image remain. Each slot is assigned one byte in
the PLC-5/40 input and output images.

1747-ASB module 1 is configured for block transfer specialty I/O


mode. Therefore, all specialty I/O modules are block transfer
mapped. If specialty I/O modules are used, their paired slots can
only use 8 point (or smaller) discrete input, discrete output, or block
transfer mapped specialty modules, as shown below. 16 point
discrete output modules can be used if their paired slots have discrete
(16 point or less) input modules in them, as shown below. 32 point
modules cannot be used with 2-slot addressing.
1746NIO4V

1746OW16

1746OW16
1746NO4V
1746OG16

1746OB16

1746OV16
1746OW8

1746OW8
1746IG16
1746IA16

1746IB16

1746IA16

1746IV16
1746OV8

1746OA8
ASB 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Slot Pair 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PLC Processor Input Image PLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number − Octal 17 10 7 0 Bit Number − Octal 17 10 7 0

Group 0 Not Used I:010 Group 0 Not Used O:010


Group 1 Not Used I:011 Group 1 Not Used O:011
Group 2 Not Used I:012 Group 2 Not Used O:012
Logical Group 3 Not Used I:013 Logical Group 3 Not Used O:013

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Rack 1 Group 4 Not Used I:014 Rack 1 Group 4 Not Used O:014
Group 5 Not Used I:015 Group 5 Not Used O:015
OW8

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
Group 6 NIO4V I:016 Group 6 NIO4V O:016
Group 7 IA16 IA16 I:017 Group 7 OW16 OW16 O:017
IG16 IG16 OG16 OG16

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 0 I:020 Group 0 O:020
Group 1 I:021 Group 1 OV8 OW8 O:021
Group 2 IB16 IB16 I:022 1747ASB Group 2 OB16 OB16 O:022 1747ASB
Logical Group 3 NO4V I:023 Module 1 Logical Group 3 NO4V OA8 O:023 Module 1
Rack 2 Group 4 IA16 IA16 I:024 Rack 2 Group 4 OW16 OW16 O:024
Group 5 IV16 IV16 I:025 Group 5 OV16 OV16 O:025
Group 6 Not Used I:026 Group 6 Not Used O:026
Group 7 Not Used I:027 Group 7 Not Used O:027

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–22 Application Examples

1747ASB Module 2 I/O Mapping Details

Because 1747-ASB module 2 is configured for 1/2-slot addressing,


has six logical groups and three slots available for I/O, all of the slots
present are mapped into the PLC-5/40 image. Since slot three cannot
be paired with slot four and only two words of image are available,
slot three has the two words assigned to it.

1747-ASB module 2 is configured for discrete mode operation.


Therefore, all speciality modules that have four or less words of
input and output image are discretely mapped, while all specialty
modules that have more than four words of input image or output
image are block transfer mapped.

Due to slot pairing, a discretely mapped four word analog input and
output module are allowed in one slot pair. The 1746-NI4 module in
slot one uses the four input words assigned to slots one and two. As
a result, slot two cannot use any input image. Conversely, it can use
the four output image words assigned to slots one and two which
then allows the 1746-NO4I output module to be installed in slot two.

Because slot three has two input and output words assigned to it and
the 1746-NIO4I module in slot three requires two input and output
words, the 1746-NIO4I module can be installed in slot three. If a
four word input or output module is installed in slot three, a
1747-ASB module error occurs because only half of the module’s
image can be mapped.

PLC Processor Input Image PLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number − Octal 17 10 7 0 Bit Number − Octal 17 10 7 0

Group 0 NI4 NI4 I:030 Group 0 NO4I NO4I O:030


Logical Group 1 NI4 NI4 I:031 Logical Group 1 NO4I NO4I O:031
Rack 3 Group 2 NI4 NI4 I:032 Rack 3 Group 2 NO4I NO4I O:032
Group 3 NI4 NI4 I:033 1747ASB Group 3 NO4I NO4I O:033 1747ASB
Group 4 NIO4I NIO4I I:034 Module 2 Group 4 NIO4I NIO4I O:034 Module 2
Group 5 NIO4I NIO4I I:035 Group 5 NIO4I NIO4I O:035
1746-NIO4I
1746-NO4I
1746-NI4
ASB 2

0 1 2 3
Group 0,1
Group 2,3
Group 4,5

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Application Examples 8–23

RIO Address Label Examples

Due to the 1747-ASB module’s addressing modes and RIO link


operation, the I/O modules controlled by the 1747-ASB module are
addressed by the PLC processor on a logical rack, logical group
basis. A label kit is included with each 1747-ASB module to assist
you in assigning the logical rack and logical group designation for
each I/O module. Refer to chapter 6 for more information regarding
these labels.

Shown below are examples of how the labels are filled out.
1746NIO4V

1746OW16

1746OW16
1746NO4V
1746OG16

1746NIO4I
1746OB16

1746OV16

1746NO4I
1746OW8

1746OW8
1746IG16
1746IA16

1746IB16

1746IA16

1746IV16
1746OV8

1746OA8

1746NI4
ASB 1

ASB 2
PLC5/40

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 1 2 3

The switch is connected The bulb is connected Meter 2 is connected Meter 1 is connected
to input 12. to output 5. to output 2. to output 0.
0-7 n 10 - 17 n 0-7 10 - 17 n 0-7 10 - 17 n 0-7 10 - 17 0-7 10 - 17
Rack Group(s) Rack Group(s) Rack Group(s) Rack Group(s) Rack Group(s)
I: 1 G7 I: I: 2 G3 I: 3 G0-G3 I: 3 G4,G5
O: O: 2 G1 O: 2 G3 O: O: 3 G4,G5
BT Discrete n BT Discrete n BT n Discrete BT Discrete n BT Discrete n
Remote PLC System Remote PLC System Remote PLC System Remote PLC System Remote PLC System

The 0-7 and 10-17 The 10-17 box is The 10-17 box is The 0-7 and 10-17 The 0-7 and 10-17
boxes are checked checked because this checked because this boxes are not boxes are not checked
because the module module requires the module requires the checked because because only words
requires more than high byte of the high byte of the only words are are considered when
one byte of image. PLC5/40 image. 0-7 PLC5/40 image. considered when this this module is mapped
must be converted to module is mapped discretely. The NIO4I
The module resides 10-17 to correspond The module resides discretely. The NI4 has two input and two
in the PLC5/40, with the PLC5/40 in the PLC, output has four words that output words that are
Input image (I:), image. image (O:), input are discretely discretely mapped into
logical rack 1, image (I:), logical mapped into PLC5/40 image.
logical group 7. The module resides rack 2, logical group PLC5/40 image.
in the PLC, Output 3. The module resides in
The discrete box is image (O:), logical The module resides the PLC5/40, Input (I:)
checked because rack 2, logical The block transfer in the PLC5/40, and Output image (O:),
the module's image group 1. box is checked Input image (I:), logical rack 3, logical
is discretely because the logical rack 3, logical groups 4 and 5.
mapped in the The discrete box is module's image is groups 0, 1, 2, and 3.
PLC5/40 image. checked because the block transfer The discrete box is
module's image is mapped into the The discrete box is checked because the
discretely mapped in PLC5/40 image. checked because the module's image is
the PLC5/40 image. module's image is discretely mapped in
discretely mapped in the PLC5/40 image.
the PLC5/40 image.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


8–24 Application Examples

Application Example Program

Shown below is an excerpt from the user program. When the


switch is closed, the bulb illuminates, decimal value 5555 is moved
to the 1746-NO4V output 2 (connected to meter 2) and to the
1746-NIO4I output 0 (connected to meter 1).

The inputs to the 1746IA16 module are in octal. The switch is I:017 MOV
wired to input 12 (octal) and its value is represented by bit 12
Switch MOVE
] [
(octal) in the processor image. Make sure that the octal label kit 12 Source 5555
16 and 32 point modules are used to convert their LED filters and
wiring labels to octal, for use with the PLC5. Dest N10:2

The 1746NO4V module is block transfer mapped. To write a Meter 2


value to the module, the data must first be written to the MOV
appropriate word in N10:0-N10:3. This integer file was chosen
as the block transfer data file for the NO4V. N10:2 corresponds MOVE
to output 2. The user program must enable the block transfer to Source 5555
the NO4V using a block transfer instruction. The data is not
transferred until the next RIO block transfer for this module Dest O:034
occurs.

The 1746NIO4I module is discretely mapped. To write a value to Meter 1


the NIO4I outputs, the value is written to the processor output
image (word O:034 corresponds to output 0 and word O:035 O:021
corresponds to output 1). The data is automatically sent to the ( )
processor on the next RIO discrete transfer. 15
BTW
BLOCK TRNSFR WRITE
The 1746OV8 module output is in octal. It has been Bulb Rack 2
adjusted because it resides in the high byte of the processor Group 3
image. The bulb is wired to output 5 that corresponds to bit 40 Module 1
(octal) of the processor image. Control Block N7:0
Data File N10:0
Length 4
Meter 2 Block Continuous Y
Transfer Instruction

The following is another representation of what is discussed above.


1746NIO4V

1746OW16

1746OW16
1746NO4V
1746OG16

1746NIO4I
1746OB16

1746OV16

1746NO4I
1746OW8

1746OW8
1746IG16
1746IA16

1746IB16

1746IA16

1746IV16
1746OV8

1746OA8

1746NI4
ASB 1

ASB 2

PLC5/40

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 1 2 3

The switch is connected The bulb is connected Meter 2 is connected Meter 1 is connected
to input 12. to output 5. to output 2. to output 0.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Appendix A
Specifications

This appendix provides adapter and system specifications, as well as


throughput information. Topics include:
• adapter operating specifications
• network specifications
• throughput introduction
• calculating throughput

Adapter Operating
Specifications
Backplane Current Consumption 375mA at 5V
32° F to 140° F
Operating Temperature (0° C to 60° C)
-40° F to +185° F
Storage Temperature
(-40° C to +85° C)
Humidity 5% to 95% noncondensing
Noise Immunity NEMA standard ICS 2230
Agency Certification •CSA certified
(when product or packaging is marked) •CSA Class I, Division 2
Groups A, B, C, D certified
•UL listed
•CE marked for all applicable directives

Network Specifications
Baud Rate Determination of Maximum Cable Length and Terminating Resistor
Size

Maximum Cable Distance


Baud Rate Resistor Size
(Belden 9463)
57.6K baud 3048 meters (10,000 feet)
U i Extended
Using E t d d 115.2K baud 1524 meters (5,000 feet) 82Ω 1/2 Watt
Node Capability
230.4K baud 762 meters (2,500 feet)
Not Using 57.6K baud 3048 meters (10,000 feet)
150Ω 1/2 Watt
Extended
e ded Node
ode 115.2K baud 1524 meters (5,000 feet)
C bili
Capability 230.4K baud 762 meters (2,500 feet) 82Ω 1/2 Watt

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


A–2 Specifications

Throughput Introduction Throughput is the time between when a control system senses an
input event on an I/O module in a 1747-ASB chassis to when an
output event occurs on an I/O module within the same 1747-ASB
chassis. There are three types of 1747-ASB module throughput:
• discrete throughput (time from discretely mapped input to
discretely mapped output) without block transfers present
• discrete throughput (time from discretely mapped input to
discretely mapped output) with block transfers present
• block transfer throughput (time from block transfer mapped input
to block transfer mapped output)

Discrete Throughput Overview

The 1747-ASB module system discrete throughput is comprised of:


• the total PLC or SLC processor scan time
• the total RIO link scan time
• 1747-ASB module backplane scan time
• the scanner module output delay time (only if scanner is a
separate module from the processor, otherwise value is 0)
• the scanner module input delay time (only if scanner is a separate
module from the processor, otherwise value is 0)
• the input module delay time
• the output module delay time
In the example on the following page, the input event occurs at a
discretely mapped I/O module. The input image of I/O module is
read by the 1747-ASB module during a 1747-ASB module
backplane scan. The input data is placed into a buffer, which is next
read by the scanner during a discrete scan of the RIO link. Once the
input data is read by the scanner, it is sent to and read by the PLC or
SLC processor.

The response or output data travels back across the RIO link to the
1747-ASB module during a discrete scan. The 1747-ASB module
writes the output data to a discretely mapped output module during a
1747-ASB module backplane scan. The output data exits the chassis
via the I/O module in order to control the field device.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Specifications A–3

Processor Scan
Scanner Scan

ASB Backplane Scan


Scanner
Processor ASB Module I/O Module I/O Module

RIO Scan

SLC Local Chassis

Outputs to Modules
Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis

Inputs from Modules


Outputs from Modules
Inputs to Modules

Output Device

Input Device

Processor Scan
Processor/Scanner
ASB Backplane Scan
ASB Module I/O Module I/O Module

RIO Scan
PLC Local Chassis

Outputs to Modules
Remote Chassis Remote Expansion Chassis

Inputs from Modules


Outputs from Modules
Inputs to Modules

Output Device

Input Device

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


A–4 Specifications

Calculating Throughput The 1747-ASB module throughput is determined by more than the
1747-ASB module itself. The input and output module delays,
scanner scan time, and processor scan time contribute to throughput
as well.

Discrete I/O Throughput without Block Transfers Present

The information in this section is used to calculate the discrete


throughput of the 1747-ASB module if both conditions are true:
• There are no block transfer mapped I/O modules in the
1747-ASB chassis.
• There are no RIO block transfers occurring on the RIO link to
any chassis.
If RIO block transfers are present on the RIO link or if the
1747-ASB chassis has block transfer mapped I/O modules, you must
use the Discrete I/O Throughput with Block Transfers Present
section.

The formula to calculate the maximum 1747-ASB module discrete


I/O throughput without block transfers present is:

Tdmnbt = 2Tps + 2TRIO + 2Tbp + TSNo + TSNi + Tid + Tod + 10ms➀


Tdmnbt = The maximum 1747ASB module discrete throughput without block transfers in
milliseconds (ms)

➀ The value of 10ms is for PLC5/11, 5/20, 5/30, 5/40, and 5/60 processors only. For all other
processors the value is not used.

To calculate throughput, substitute values for the variables in the


formula above. Locate these values in the following documents:

Variable Variable Description Location of Variable


The total processor scan time PLC or SLC programming
Tps
(ms) manual

The scanner module input


delay time (ms) (only if scanner
TSNi scanner user manual
is a separate module,
otherwise value is 0)
The scanner module output
delay time (ms) (only if scanner
TSNo scanner user manual
is a separate module,
otherwise value is 0)
SLC I/O product data and I/O
Tid The input delay time (ms)
instruction sheets
SLC I/O product data and I/O
Tod The output delay time (ms)
instruction sheets
TRIO The total RIO scan time (ms) page A-5 of this manual

1747ASB module backplane


Tbp page A-6 of this manual
scan time (ms)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Specifications A–5

RIO Scan Time Calculation (TRIO)


The RIO scan time is calculated by identifying the baud rate and
image size of each logical device on the RIO link. Locate the
corresponding time value in the following table. If you are using
multiple logical devices, add the time values together to determine
the total RIO scan time (TRIO).

TRIO = Tadapter 1 + Tadapter 2 + Tadapter 3

RIO Scan Times for Adapters➀

Adapter Baud Rate


Size 57.6K 115.2K 230.4K
1/4 logical
6.0ms 3.5ms 2.5ms
rack
1/2 logical
6.5ms 4.0ms 2.75ms
rack
3/4 logical
7.5ms 4.5ms 3.0ms
rack
Full logical
9.5ms 5.5ms 3.5ms
rack
➀ The table shown above is based on PLC5 processors. If another type of processor is used, refer
to its user manual for TRIO.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


A–6 Specifications

1747ASB Module Backplane Scan Time (Tbp)


The 1747-ASB module backplane scan time is determined by the
type of I/O modules in the 1747-ASB chassis and the baud rate. To
calculate the 1747-ASB module backplane scan time (Tbp), first add
the I/O module scan times together to determine the base backplane
scan time (Tb):

Tb(Tbase backplane scan time)➀ = TI/O module1 + TI/O module 2


➀ Only modules mapped to the 1747ASB image; unmapped modules are not scanned.

Locate the appropriate I/O module scan times in the following table:

Backplane Scan Times (Tb)


Scan Time
I/O Module
(ms)
4 point input 0.210
8 point input 0.210
16 point input 0.325
32 point input 0.560
2 word specialty input 0.625
4 word specialty input 1.100
6 word specialty input 1.575
8 word specialty input 2.048
4 point output 0.170
8 point output 0.170
16 point output 0.273
32 point output 0.470
2 word specialty output 0.620
4 word specialty output 1.028
6 word specialty output 1.440
8 word specialty output 1.745
4, 6, and 12 point combination 0.380

Now substitute the base backplane scan time (Tb) into the
appropriate equation, based on your baud rate, to solve for the
1747-ASB module backplane scan time (Tbp):

1747ASB Module Backplane Scan


Baud Rate
Time (Tbp)
57.6K baud 1.15Tb + 1.38
115.2K baud 1.32Tb + 1.58
230.4K baud 1.67Tb + 2.00

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Specifications A–7

Discrete I/O Throughput without Block Transfers Present Example


A PLC 5/40 is controlling an RIO link running at 115.2K baud that
has the following adapters:
• One 1747-ASB module configured as 1/2 logical rack with 1-slot
addressing and discrete specialty I/O mode
slot 1 - 1746IB16, 16 point input module
slot 2 - 1746OB16, 16 point output module
slot 3 - 1746NIO4I, 2 input/ 2 output analog module

• Two adapters, each configured as a full logical rack


• Three adapters, each configured as a 1/4 logical rack
1. Use the throughput formula to calculate the maximum
throughput.
Tdmnbt = 2Tps + 2TRIO + 2Tbp + TSNo + TSNi + Tid + Tod + 10ms➀
Tdmnbt = The maximum 1747ASB module discrete throughput without block transfers in
milliseconds (ms)

Tps = 25.0 ms, which is from the PLC 5/40 programming manual

TRIO = The total RIO scan time (ms)

Tbp = 1747ASB module backplane scan time (ms)

TSNo = 0 since you are using a PLC processor with a built in scanner

TSNi= 0 since you are using a PLC processor with a built in scanner

Tid = 10.0 ms, which is from I/O module instruction sheets

Tod = 1.0 ms, which is from I/O module instruction sheets

Tdmnbt = 2(25) + 2TRIO + 2Tbp + 0 + 0 + 10.0 + 1.0 + 10ms➀

2. Since there are two unknown values, continue with steps three
through seven on the following page.
3. Calculate the 1747-ASB module backplane scan time (Tbp).
Determine the backplane scan time for each module in slots one,
two, and three.
slot 1 - 1747IB16, 16 point input module = .325ms
slot 2 - 1747OB16, 16 point output module = .273ms
slot 3 - 1746NIO4I, 2 input/ 2 output analog module = input = .625ms
output = .620ms➁
These values are listed in the Backplane Scan Time table on the page A-6.
➀ The value of 10ms is for PLC5/11, 5/20, 5/30, 5/40, and 5/60 processors only. For all other
PLC5 processors the value is not required.
➁ Since the 1746NIO4I has both input and output image, each amount is needed to calculate base
backplane scan time (Tb).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


A–8 Specifications

4. Add the backplane scan times together for each module in slots
one, two, and three.
Tbase backplane scan time (Tb) = TI/O module1 + TI/O module 2 + TI/O module 3
Tb= .325ms + .273ms + .625ms + .620ms
Tb= 1.843ms

5. Use the appropriate Total Backplane Scan Time formula found on


page A–6 to calculate the total backplane scan time.
Tbp = 1.32Tb + 1.58
Tbp = 1.32(1.843ms) + 1.58
Tbp = 4.01ms

6. Calculate the total RIO scan time (TRIO). Locate the baud rate
(115.2K)and adapter size which is found in the table on page
A–5. Multiply the RIO scan times listed under the 115.2K
heading by the number of each different type of rack that you
have. Add those numbers together:
TRIO = Tadapter 1 + Tadapter 2 + Tadapter 3
TRIO = 1(4.0ms) + 2(5.0ms) + 3(3.5ms)
TRIO = 24.5ms

7. Substitute all the values for variables in the throughput formula


and solve for throughput:
Tdmnbt = 2Tps + 2TRIO + 2Tbp + TSNo + TSNi + Tid + Tod + 10ms➀
Tdmnbt = 2(25)+ 2(24.5) + 2(4.01) + 0 + 0 + 10.0 + 1.0 + 10
Tdmnbt = 128.02 ms = maximum throughput

Discrete I/O Throughput with Block Transfers Present

The information in this section is used to calculate the discrete


throughput of the 1747-ASB module if either of the following
conditions are true:
• There are block transfer mapped I/O modules in the 1747-ASB
chassis.
• There are RIO block transfers occurring on the RIO link to any
chassis.
If RIO block transfers not are present on the RIO link or if the
1747-ASB chassis has no block transfer mapped I/O modules, you
must use the Discrete I/O Throughput without Block Transfers
Present section.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Specifications A–9

To calculate discrete I/O throughput with block transfers present, use


the following formula:

Tdmbt = Tdmnbt + 2Tbtx

Tdm-bt = The maximum 1747-ASB module discrete throughput with block transfers
in
milliseconds (ms)

Tdm-nbt = The maximum 1747-ASB module discrete throughput without block


transfers in milliseconds (ms)

Tbtx = Additional time due to sending any RIO block transfer data on the RIO link

Important: You will need to use the backplane scan times located in
the top table on page A–6. You must include the time
necessary to scan all the words of all the I/O modules in
the 1747-ASB chassis, including the block transfer
mapped I/O modules. For example, if a 1746-BAS
module is used, (Tb) must include the time needed to
scan 8 input and 8 output words even though the
1746-BAS module consumes only 2 bytes in the
1747-ASB image.
Before determining (Tbtx), you need to establish the maximum block
transfer write or read length that is to be processed by each logical
device on the RIO link including the 1747-ASB module.

RIO scan time is increased each time an RIO block transfer is sent to
any logical device on the RIO network even if it is not sent to the
1747-ASB module. The scan time increase depends on the number
of words sent in the block transfer and the selected baud rate. RIO
link protocol allows for a maximum of one RIO block transfer to be
sent to each logical device on the RIO link during any single RIO
scan. The RIO scan increase (Tri) for each logical device is:

Baud Rate RIO Scan Time Increase (Tri)


57.6K baud 0.300 x block transfer length + 5.0ms
115.2K baud 0.150 x block transfer length + 3.5ms
230.4K baud 0.075 x block transfer length + 2.0ms

The total increase in the RIO scan time (Tbtx) is equal to:

Tbtx = sum of Tri for all logical devices

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


A–10 Specifications

Discrete I/O Throughput with Block Transfers Present Example


A PLC 5/40 is controlling a 115.2K baud RIO link that has 3
adapters and 4 logical devices.

1747-ASB module:
• starting logical rack 0, logical group 0
• 12 logical groups (1 1/2 logical racks)
• one 8 word and two 4 word block transfer write/read modules in
logical rack 0
• one 2 word block transfer write/read module in logical rack 1
1771-ASB module:
• starting logical rack 2, logical group 0
• 2 logical groups (1/4 logical racks)
• one 64 word block transfer write/read module
1771-ASB module
• starting logical rack 2, logical group 2
• 2 logical groups (1/4 logical racks)
• one 64 word block transfer write/read module
1. Tdm-nbt equals 80ms➀ for a specific pair of discretely mapped
input and output modules. The maximum throughput for these
discretely mapped I/O modules when block transfers are present
are:
Tdmbt = Tdmnbt + 2Tbtx
Tdmbt = 80ms + 2Tbtx
➀ This number is arbitrarily assigned.

2. Determine the maximum length of the block transfer to each


logical device. There are two logical devices for the 1747-ASB
module. The largest block transfer that is possible with the full
logical rack, logical device is 8 words. The largest block transfer
that is possible with the 1/2 logical rack, logical device is 2
words.
3. Substitute the maximum length of each logical device into:
Tri = 0.150 x block transfer length + 3.5ms
Tri = (0.150 x 8 ) + 3.5ms
Tri1 = 4.7ms
Tri = (0.150 x 2 ) + 3.5ms
Tri2 = 3.8ms

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Specifications A–11

4. There is one logical device for each 1771-ASB module. The


largest block transfer for 1/4 logical racks is 64 words. Calculate
the maximum length for these logical devices:
Tri = 0.150 x block transfer length + 3.5ms
Tri = (0.150 x 64 ) + 3.5ms
Tri3 & 4 = 13.1ms

5. Add up all of the maximum word lengths:


Tbtx = Tri1 +Tri2 + Tri3 + Tri4
Tbtx = 4.7+ 3.8 + 13.1 + 13.1
Tbtx = 34.7ms

6. Substitute all the values for variables in the throughput formula


and solve for throughput:
Tdmbt = Tdmnbt + 2Tbtx
Tdmbt = 80ms + 2(34.7)ms
Tdmbt = 149.4ms

Block Transfer Throughput

Block transfer throughput is always slower than discrete data


transfer. It is dependent on the time involved for the:
• PLC control program to enable the block transfer➀
• PLC to generate a request for a block transfer➀
• 1747-ASB module to acknowledge the request➁
• PLC to initiate the block transfer➀
• time involved to block transfer the data➂
• 1747-ASB backplane scan➃
➀ This is dependent on the PLC processor and scanner.
➁ Once the block transfer is request is received, the acknowledgement occurs in no more than one
backplane scan and two RIO scans.
➂ The time involved to block transfer data is calculated using the T formula in the previous section.
ri
➃ The 1747ASB backplane scan time is calculated in the same manner as described in the discrete
throughput sections.

As noted above, block transfer timing is PLC dependent. To


calculate block transfer throughput, refer to the applicable PLC
programming document.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Appendix B
Understanding Your
SLC 500/1746 Control System

This appendix provides information on using SLC 500/1746 control


systems. Topics include:
• selecting your SLC 500/1746 control power supply
• system installation recommendations
• mounting your control system
• installing your I/O modules
• wiring the I/O modules
• calculating heat dissipation for your control system

Selecting Your SLC 500/1746 When configuring a modular system, you must have an individual
Control Power Supply power supply for each chassis. Careful system configuration will
result in the best performance. Excessive loading of the power
supply outputs can cause a power supply shutdown or premature
failure. All power supplies are protected by a replaceable fuse
except for the 1746-P4.

There are three different ac power supplies and one dc power supply.
For ac power supplies, the 120/240V selection is made by a jumper.
Place the jumper to match the input voltage. The power supply has
an LED that illuminates when the power supply is functioning
properly. Following are the general specifications for the power
supplies.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–2 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Power Supply Specifications

Description 1746P1 1746P2 1746P3 1746P4


85-132/170-265V ac 85-132/170-265V ac 85-132/170-265V ac
Line Voltage 19.2-28.8V dc
47-63 Hz 47-63 Hz 47-63 Hz
Typical Line Power
135 VA 180 VA 90 VA 240 VA
Requirement➀
Maximum Inrush
20A 20A 20A 45A
Current
Internal Current 2A at 5V dc 5A at 5V dc 3.6A at 5V dc 10.0A at 5V dc
Capacity 0.46A at 24V dc 0.96A at 24V dc 0.87A at 24V dc 2.88A at 24V dc➁
1746F1 or equivalent: 1746F3 or equivalent:
1746F2 or equivalent:
250V-3A Fuse 125V-5A Fuse
250V-3A Fuse Nonreplaceable fuse is
Fuse Protection➂ Nagasawa Nagasawa
SANO SOC SD4 or soldered in place.
ULCS61ML3 ULCS61ML5
BUSSMANN AGC 3
or BUSSMANN AGC 3 or BUSSMAN AGC 5
24V dc User Power
200 mA 200 mA NA 1A➂
Current Capacity
24V dc User Power
18-30V dc 18-30V dc NA 20.4-27.6V dc
Voltage Range
Ambient Operating 0° C to 60° C
0° C to 60° C (32° F to 140° F)
Temperature (32° F to 140° F)
(Current capacity derated 5% above 55° C)
Rating no derating
Storage
-40° C to 85° C (-40° F to 185° F)
Temperature
Humidity Rating 5-95% (noncondensing)
Wiring two 2mm2 cross section (#14 AWG) wires per terminal (maximum)
Agency • CSA certified
Certification • CSA Class I, Division 2
(when product or Groups A, B, C, D certified
packaging is • UL listed
marked) • CE marked for all applicable directives
Hazardous
Environment Class I Division 2 Class I Division 2 Class I Division 2 Pending
Certification

NA (Not Applicable)
➀ Refer to page B-30 to determine line power requirements for your configuration.
➁ The combination of all output power (5V backplane, 24V backplane, and 24V user source) cannot
exceed 70W.
➂ Power supply fuse is intended to guard against fire hazard due to short circuit conditions and may
not protect the supply from damage under overload conditions.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–3

Example for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply

Select a power supply for chassis 1 and chassis 2 for the control
system below. (The worksheets for this example start on
page B–5.)

Chassis 1 Chassis 2
IBM PC

? ?
Slot 0 1 2 3 Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Catalog Number
1747AIC RIO Link

DH485 Network

Chassis 1 Contains:

Slot Catalog Power Supply at Power Supply at


Description
Number Number 5V dc (Amps) 24V dc (Amps)
0 Processor Unit 1747L524 0.35 0.105
1 Remote I/O Scanner 1747SN 0.90 NA
2 Transistor Output Module 1746OB8 0.135 NA
3 Triac Output Module 1746OA16 0.37 NA
Peripheral
Isolated Link Coupler 1747AIC NA 0.085
device
Total Current: 1.755 0.190➀
➀ Power Supply 1746P1 is sufficient for Chassis #1. The Internal Current Capacity" for this power
supply is 2 Amps at 5V dc, 0.46 Amps at 24V dc.

Chassis 2 Contains:

Slot Catalog Power Supply at Power Supply at


Description
Number Number 5V dc (Amps) 24V dc (Amps)
0 Remote I/O Adapter 1747ASB 0.375 NA
1 Input Module 1746IA16 0.085 NA
2 Input Module 1746IA16 0.085 NA
3 Relay Output Modules 1746OB32 0.452 NA
4 Relay Output Modules 1746OB32 0.452 NA
5 Relay Output Modules 1746OB32 0.452 NA
6 Combination Module 1746IO12 0.09 0.07
Total Current: 1.991 0.07➀
➀ Power Supply 1746P2 is sufficient for Chassis #2. The Internal Current Capacity" for this power
supply is 5 Amps at 5V dc, 0.96 Amps at 24V dc.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–4 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Example Worksheet for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply


Procedure
1. For each slot of the chassis that contains a module, list the slot number, the catalog number of the module, and its 5V and 24V
maximum currents.
1
Chassis Number: _______ 2
Chassis Number: _______
Catalog Maximum Currents Catalog Maximum Currents
Number 5V 24V Number 5V 24V
slot _______
0 _________
L524 ______________
0.350 0.105 slot _______
0 _________
ASB ______________
0.375 NA
slot _______
1 _________
SN ______________
0.900 NA slot _______
1 _________
IA16 ______________
0.085 NA
slot _______
2 _________
OB8 ______________
0.135 NA slot _______
2 _________
IA16 ______________
0.085 NA
slot _______
3 _________
OA16 ______________
0.370 NA slot _______
3 _________
OB32 ______________
0.452 NA
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______
4 _________
OB32 ______________
0.452 NA
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______
5 _________
OB32 ______________
0.452 NA
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______
6 _________
IO12 ______________
0.090 0.070
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______ _________ ______________

Peripheral Peripheral
Device _________
AIC ______________
NA 0.190 Device _________ ______________

2. Add the power supply loading currents of


all the system devices ( at 5V and 24V).
___________ ___________
Total Current: 1.755 0.190 Total Current: 1.991 0.070
When using the 1746-P4 power supply, use the formula below to calculate
total power consumption of all the system devices (at 5V and 24V). Note that
the 1746-P4 total power supply loading currents cannot exceed 70 Watts. If
you are not using a 1746-P4 power supply, proceed to step 3.

The user current @ 24V listed below is for example only. The current
required depends on the application.

Total current Total current User Current Total Power Total current Total current User Current Total Power
@ 5V @ 24V @ 24V @ 5V @ 24V @ 24V

x 5V) + x24V) + x 24V) = W x 5V) + ( x 24V) + x 24V) = W


3. Compare the Total Current required for the chassis with the Internal Current Capacity of the power supplies.
To select the proper power supply for your chassis, make sure that the power supply loading current for the chassis is less than the
internal current capacity for the power supply, for both 5V and 24V loads.

Internal Current Capacity


5V 24V
Catalog Number 1746P1 2.0A | 0.46A
Catalog Number 1746P2 5.0A | 0.96A
Catalog Number 1746P3 3.6A | 0.87A
Catalog Number 1746P4 10.0A | 2.88A (70W maximum)

Required Power Supply for this Chassis: 1746 P1 Required Power Supply for this Chassis: 1746 P2

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–5

Worksheet for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply


Make copies of this worksheet as needed. For a detailed list of device load currents, refer to the SLC 500
price sheet, product instruction sheet, or appropriate product data.

Procedure
1. For each slot of the chassis that contains a module, list the slot number, the catalog number of the module, and its 5V and 24V
maximum currents.
Chassis Number: _______ Chassis Number: _______
Catalog Maximum Currents Catalog Maximum Currents
Number 5V 24V Number 5V 24V
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______ _________ ______________
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______ _________ ______________
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______ _________ ______________
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______ _________ ______________
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______ _________ ______________
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______ _________ ______________
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______ _________ ______________
slot _______ _________ ______________ slot _______ _________ ______________

Peripheral Peripheral
Device _________ ______________ Device _________ ______________

2. Add the power supply loading currents of


all the system devices ( at 5V and 24V).
___________ ___________
Total Current: Total Current:
When using the 1746-P4 power supply, use the formula below to calculate
total power consumption of all the system devices (at 5V and 24V). Note that
the 1746-P4 total power supply loading currents cannot exceed 70 Watts. If
you are not using a 1746-P4 power supply, proceed to step 3.

The user current @ 24V listed below is for example only. The current
required depends on the application.

Total current Total current User Current Total Power Total current Total current User Current Total Power
@ 5V @ 24V @ 24V @ 5V @ 24V @ 24V

x 5V) + x24V) + x 24V) = W x 5V) + ( x 24V) + x 24V) = W


3. Compare the Total Current required for the chassis with the Internal Current Capacity of the power supplies.
To select the proper power supply for your chassis, make sure that the power supply loading current for the chassis is less than the
internal current capacity for the power supply, for both 5V and 24V loads.

Internal Current Capacity


5V 24V
Catalog Number 1746P1 2.0A | 0.46A
Catalog Number 1746P2 5.0A | 0.96A
Catalog Number 1746P3 3.6A | 0.87A
Catalog Number 1746P4 10.0A | 2.88A (70W maximum)

Required Power Supply for this Chassis: 1746 Required Power Supply for this Chassis: 1746

Consider future system expansion when selecting a power supply.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–6 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

SLC 500 System This section provides specific recommendations to help you install
Installation your SLC 500/1746 components. For general installation guidelines,
Recommendations also refer to the requirements specific to your region.
• Europe: Reference the standards found in EN 60204 and your
national regulations.
• United States: Refer to article 70E of the National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA). It describes electrical safety
requirements for employee workplaces.

Typical Installation

The figure below consists of some components that make up a


typical installation.

1
2 Disconnect Device

1 An IEC or NEMArated enclosure suitable for 4


your application and environment that shields MCR
your adapter from electrical noise and airborne
contaminants 6
2 Disconnect device that allows you to remove power
from the system 3
Isolation Transformer
3 Fused isolation transformer or a constant voltage
transformer, as your application requires
4 Master control relay/emergencystop circuit 5

5 Terminal blocks or wiring ducts SLC 500 Chassis


6 Suppression devices for limiting electromagnetic
interference (EMI) generation

Selecting an Enclosure

The enclosure protects the equipment from atmospheric


contamination. Standards established by the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) and National Electrical
Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) define enclosure types based
on the degree of protection an enclosure will provide. Select an IEC-
or NEMA-rated enclosure that suits your application and
environment.

The enclosure should be equipped with a disconnect device. To


calculate the heat dissipation of your controller, refer to Calculating
Heat Dissipation on page B–30.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–7

Spacing Considerations

Up to three chassis can be connected (for a maximum of 30 I/O


slots). Follow the recommended minimum spacing shown below to
allow for convection cooling within the enclosure.

Important: Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes


for the chassis. Do not drill holes above a mounted
control system.

➌ ➌

1746C9 Cable

1746C9
➊ ➊ Cable
1746C7 Cable

➋ ➋ ➋ ➋

➍ 1746C9
➌ ➊ Cable

Recommended Spacing
➊ 15.3 to 20 cm (6 to 8 in.) when using the 1746C9 cable
Important: When making a vertical connection between two A13 chassis with a
1746C9 cable, you must limit the space to 15.3 cm (6 in.) for the C9 cable to reach
from chassis to chassis.

➋ Greater than 10.2 cm (4 in.)


➌ Greater than 15.3 cm (6 in.)

➍ 7.7 to 10.2 cm (3 to 4 in.) when using the 1746C7 cable

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–8 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Preventing Excessive Heat

For most applications, normal convection cooling will keep the


adapter components within the specified operating range of 0° to
+60° C (+32° to +140° F). Proper spacing of components within the
enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation.

In some applications, a substantial amount of heat is produced by


other equipment inside or outside the enclosure. In this case, place
blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to
reduce “hot spots” near the adapter.

Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient


temperatures are encountered.

Important: Do not bring in unfiltered outside air. It may introduce


harmful contaminants of dirt that could cause improper
operation or damage to components. In extreme cases,
you may need to use air conditioning to protect against
heat build-up within the enclosure.

Wiring Layout

Careful wire routing within the enclosure helps to cut down electrical
noise between I/O lines. Follow these rules for routing your wires:
• Route incoming power to the power supply by a separate path
from wiring to I/O devices. Where paths must cross, their
intersection should be perpendicular.
Important: Do not run signal or communications wiring and
power wiring in the same conduit.
• If wiring ducts are used, allow for at least 5 cm (2 in.) between
I/O wiring ducts and the adapter. If the terminal strips are used
for I/O wiring, allow for at least 5 cm (2 in.) between the terminal
strips and the adapter.
• Limit the cable length for the TTL input module to 15 m (50 ft)
per point and 3 m (10 ft) per point for the TTL output module.
Use low power dc I/O wiring even though it is less tolerant to
electrical noise.

ATTENTION: Handle the TTL module by its


ends, not metallic surfaces. Electrostatic discharges
! can damage the module. Do not expose the TTL
module to electrostatic charges.

• Segregate I/O wiring by signal type. Bundle wiring with similar


electrical characteristics together.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–9

Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed into the


enclosure by separate paths. Refer to Allen-Bradley Programmable
Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines, Publication Number
1770-4.1.

ATTENTION: United States Only: If the adapter is


being installed within a potentially hazardous
! environment (i.e., Class I, Division 2), all wiring must
comply with the requirements stated in the National
Electrical Code 501-4 (b).

Grounding Guidelines

In solid-state control systems, grounding helps limit the effects of


electrical noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). The
ground path for the adapter and its enclosure is provided by the
equipment grounding conductor.

Normal Electrical Noise Conditions Severe Electrical Noise Conditions

5.2 mm2 (10 AWG)


to Ground Bus Chassis Mounting Tab

Chassis Ground
Mounting Tab Size M4 or M5 Lug Size M4 or M5
(#10 or #12) (#10 or #12)
Hardware Hardware
Size M4 or M5 Size M4 or M5
(#10 or #12) (#10 or #12)
Internal Star Internal Star
Washer Washers

Tapped Hole Tapped Hole


(Minimum of Three (Minimum of
Threads) Three Threads)
Scrape paint off panel to insure Metal Panel Scrape paint off panel to insure Metal Panel
electrical connection between (Must be connected to electrical connection between chassis (Must be connected to
chassis earth ground.) and grounded metal panel. earth ground.)
and grounded metal panel.

ATTENTION: The 1746 chassis, the enclosure, and


other control devices must be properly grounded. All
! applicable codes and ordinances must be observed
when wiring the adapter system.

Ground connections should run from the chassis and power supply of
each chassis and expansion unit to the ground bus. Exact
connections will differ between applications.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–10 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Europe: Reference EN 60204 for safety information on grounding.


Also, refer to Allen-Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding
and Wiring Guidelines, Publication Number 1770-4.1.

United States: An authoritative source on grounding requirements


for most installations is the National Electrical Code. Also, refer to
Allen-Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring
Guidelines, Publication Number 1770-4.1.

In addition to the grounding required for the adapter and its


enclosure, you must also provide proper grounding for all controlled
devices in your application. Care must be taken to provide each
device with an acceptable grounding path.

This figure shows you how to run ground connections from the
chassis to the ground bus. Two acceptable grounding methods are
shown; we recommend using a ground bus because it reduces the
electrical resistance at the connection.

Earth Ground

5.2 mm2 (10 AWG)

2 mm2
(14 AWG)

2 mm2 Note: Keep wire


(14 AWG) length as short as
possible.

2 mm2
(14 AWG) Preferred Grounding Method
5.2 mm2 (10 AWG)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–11

Master Control Relay

A hard-wired master control relay (supplied by user) provides a


convenient means for emergency shutdown. Since the master
control relay allows the placement of several Emergency-Stop
switches in different locations, its installation is important from a
safety standpoint. Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push
buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens, the
master control relay is de-energized. This removes power to input
and output device circuits.

ATTENTION: Never alter these circuits to defeat


their function, since serious injury and/or machine
! damage could result.

Important: If you are using a dc power supply, interrupt the dc side


rather than the ac side to avoid the additional delay of
power supply turn-on and turn-off. The dc power
supply should receive its power directly from the fused
secondary of the transformer. Connect the power to the
dc input and output circuits through a set of master
control relay contacts.
Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and
maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. If you
mount a disconnect switch inside the system enclosure, place the
switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure, so that you
can disconnect power without opening the enclosure.

Whenever any of the emergency-stop switches are opened, power to


input and output devices is stopped.

When you use the master control relay to remove power from the
external I/O circuits, power continues to be provided to the system’s
power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still
be observed.

The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the


controller. It is intended for any situation where the operator must
quickly de-energize I/O devices only. When inspecting or installing
terminal connections, replacing output fuses, or working on
equipment within the enclosure, use the disconnect to shut off power
to the rest of the system.

Important: The operator must not control the master control relay
with the processor. Provide the operator with the safety
of a direct connection between an emergency stop
switch and the master control relay.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–12 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

EmergencyStop Switches

Adhere to the following points concerning Emergency-Stop


switches:
• Do not program Emergency-Stop switches in the program. Any
Emergency Stop switch should turn off all machine power by
turning off the master control relay.
• Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and
labeling of Emergency-Stop switches.
• Install Emergency-Stop switches and the master control relay in
your system. Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient
rating for your application. Emergency-Stop switches must be
easy to reach. See the following schematics.
Important: The illustrations only show output circuits with MCR
protection. In most applications input circuits do not
require MCR protection; however, if you need to
remove power from all field devices, you must include
MCR contacts in series with input power wiring.

Schematic (Using IEC Symbols)


L1 L2
230V ac

Disconnect
Fuse MCR

230V ac
Output Circuits

Isolation Operation of either of these contacts will


Transformer remove power from the adapter external I/O
circuits, stopping machine motion.
X1 115V ac X2 Master Control Relay (MCR)
Cat. No. 700PK400A1
EmergencyStop Start
Push Button Suppressor
Fuse Overtravel Stop Cat. No. 700N24
Limit Switch

MCR

Suppr.
MCR

MCR
115V ac
Output Circuits

dc Power Supply.
Use IEC 950/EN 60950
MCR
+
(Lo) (Hi) 24V dc
Output
Incoming Line Terminals. Connect to Circuits
115V ac terminals of Power Supply. Incoming line terminals. Connect to
24V dc terminals of Power Supply.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–13

Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols)


L1 L2
230V ac

Disconnect
Fuse MCR

230V ac
Output Circuits

Isolation Operation of either of these contacts will


Transformer remove power from the adapter external I/O
circuits, stopping machine motion.
X1 115V ac X2 Master Control Relay (MCR)
Cat. No. 700PK400A1
EmergencyStop
Push Button Overtravel Suppressor
Fuse Start Cat. No. 700N24
Limit Switch Stop

MCR

Suppr.
MCR

MCR
115V ac
Output Circuits

dc Power Supply.
Use N.E.C. Class 2
for UL Listing. MCR
+
(Lo) (Hi) 24V dc
Output
Incoming Line Terminals. Connect to Circuits
115V ac terminals of Power Supply. Incoming line terminals. Connect to
24V dc terminals of Power Supply.

Common Power Source

We strongly recommend that all chassis power supplies have the


same power source as the input and output devices. This helps
reduce the chance of electrical interference due to multiple sources
and grounds, as well as helps maintain system integrity if power is
interrupted.

If you do not use a common power source, you need to apply power
to the expansion chassis before you apply power to the chassis
containing the adapter to avoid an unwanted fault. That is, if the
adapter detects the absence of power to any chassis in the system, the
STAT LED turns on and all adapter outputs are de-energized.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–14 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Loss of Power Source

The chassis power supplies are designed to withstand brief power


losses without affecting the operation of the system. The time the
system is operational during power loss is called “Scan Hold-up time
after Loss of Power.” The duration of the power supply hold-up time
depends on the number, type and state of the I/O modules, but is
typically between 20 ms and 3 s. When the duration of power loss
reaches this limit, the power supply signals can no longer provide
adequate dc power to the system. This is referred to as a power
supply shutdown. The power supply LED is turned off.

In multi-chassis systems, power outages of 20 to 300 ms in duration


can cause a power fail error to occur. You can clear this error by
cycling power to your system.

Input States on Power Down

The power supply hold-up time as described above is generally


longer than the turn-on and turn-off times of the input modules.
Because of this, the input state change from “On” to “Off” that
occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the 1747-ASB
and sent to the processor before the power supply shuts down the
system. Understanding this concept is important. The user program
should be written to take this effect into account. For example, hard
wire power to one spare input. In the user program, check to be sure
that one input is On; otherwise, jump to the end of the program and
avoid scanning the logic. Use of a common power source as
recommended in the previous section is assumed.

Other Types of Line Conditions

Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily


interrupted. It is also possible that the voltage level drops
substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of
time. Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power
for the system.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–15

Power Conditioning Considerations

There are two types of power conditioning considerations: isolation


and suppression.

Isolation
If there is high frequency conducted noise in or around your
distribution equipment, we recommend the use of an isolation
transformer in the ac line to the power supply. This type of
transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system
and is often used as a “step down” transformer to reduce line
voltage. Any transformer used with the adapter must have a
sufficient power rating for its load. This power rating is generally
expressed in volt-amperes (VA).

To select an appropriate isolation transformer, you must calculate the


power required by the chassis power supply (or supplies if the
system has expansion chassis) and any input circuits and output
loads that are connected through this transformer.

The power requirement for the input circuits is determined by the


number of inputs, the operating voltage, and the nominal input
current. The power requirement for output loads is determined by
the number of outputs, the load voltage, and load current.

For example, if you have a 1746-P1 power supply, 1746-IV16


16-point dc input module (0.012A at 24V dc) and a 1746-OV16
16-point dc transistor sink output module (0.5A at 24V dc), the
power consumed would be:

230 VA + (16)(24V)(0.012A) + (16)(24V)(0.5A) = 426.6 VA

Important: In this case, 0.5A is the maximum rating of the


transistor sink output (at 30° C). If your load draws less
than 0.5A, this figure may be reduced accordingly. The
output portion of the VA calculation should reflect the
current requirements of your loads.
In general, we recommend that the transformer is oversized to
provide some margin for line voltage variations and other factors.
Typically a transformer that is 25% larger than the calculated VA is
sufficient.

Suppression
Most industrial environments are susceptible to power transients or
spikes. To help insure fault-free operation and protection of
equipment, we recommend suppression devices on power to the
equipment in addition to the isolation equipment.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–16 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Special Considerations

The recommendations given previously will provide favorable


operating conditions for most adapter installations. Your application
may involve one or more of the following adverse conditions.
Additional measures can be taken to minimize the effect of these
conditions.

Excessive Line Voltage Variations


The best solution for excessive line voltage variation is to correct
any feeder problems in your distribution system. Where this does
not solve the line variation problem, or in certain critical
applications, use a constant voltage transformer. If you require a
constant voltage transformer, connect it to the power supply and all
input devices connected to the 1747-ASB chassis.

Connect output devices on the same power line, but their connection
along the power line is normally made before the constant voltage
transformer. A constant voltage transformer must have a sufficient
power rating for its load.

Excessive Noise
When you operate the 1747-ASB module in a “noise polluted”
industrial environment, special consideration should be given to
possible electrical interference.

The following reduces the effect of electrical interference:


• 1747-ASB design features
• proper mounting of adapter within an enclosure
• proper equipment grounding
• proper routing of wiring
• proper suppression added to noise generating devices
Inductive loads, such as relays, solenoids, and motor starters, when
operated by “hard contacts” like push buttons or selector switches,
generate surges on the ac line. Suppression may be necessary when
such loads are connected as output devices or when connected to the
same supply line that powers the adapter.

Lack of surge suppression on inductive loads may contribute to


faults and sporadic operation, RAM can be corrupted (lost), and I/O
modules may appear to be faulty or reset themselves.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–17

If you connect a 1746 triac output module to control an inductive


load, we recommend that you use varistors for surge suppression.
Choose a varistor that is appropriate for the application. The surge
suppressors we recommend for triac outputs when switching 120V
ac inductive loads are a Harris MOV, part number V220 MA2A, or
an Allen-Bradley MOV, Catalog Number 599-K04 or 599-KA04,
Series C or later.

Consult the varistor manufacturer’s data sheet when selecting a


varistor for your application.

ATTENTION: Do not use suppressors having RC


networks, since damage to triacs could occur.
! Allen-Bradley ac surge suppressors not recommended
for use with triacs include Catalog Numbers
199-FSMA1, 199-FSMA2, 1401-N10, and 700-N24.

Applications such as high frequency welding equipment and large ac


motors generate excessively high levels of electrical noise. In these
applications, all possible sources of noise should be suppressed.
Achieve best results when the noise suppressors are connected as
closely as possible to the surge generating device. (See table below.)

Suppressor Catalog
Device Coil Voltage
Number
Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 120V ac 599K04➀
Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 240V ac 599KA04➀
Bulletin 100 Contactor 120V ac 199FSMA1➁
Bulletin 100 Contactor 240V ac 199F5MA2➁
Bulletin 709 Motor Starter 120V ac 1401N10➁
Bulletin 700 Type R, RM Relays ac coil None Required
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 12V dc 700N22
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 12V dc 700N28
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 24V dc 700N10
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 24V dc 700N13
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 48V dc 700N16
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 48V dc 700N17
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 115-125V dc 700N11
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 115-125V dc 700N14
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 230-250V dc 700N12
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 230-250V dc 700N15
Bulletin 700 Type N, P, or PK Relay 150V max, ac or dc 700N24➁
Miscellaneous electromagnetic
150V max, ac or dc 700N24➁
devices limited to 35 sealed VA
➀ Series C or later of these catalog numbers do not contain capacitors. They are recommended for
use with SLC 500 triac outputs.
➁ Not recommended for use with triac outputs.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–18 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Class I, Division 2 Applications (United States Only)


Important: When installing peripheral devices (for example, push
buttons, lamps) into a hazardous environment, ensure
that they are Class I, Division 2 certified, or determined
to be safe for the environment.

Output Contact Protection

Inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids may


require the use of some type of surge suppression to protect the
controller output contacts. Switching inductive loads without Surge
Suppression can significantly reduce lifetime or relay contacts. The
figure below details the use of surge suppression devices.

Surge Suppression for Inductive ac Load Devices

Output Device Output Device Output Device


Surge
Suppressor

Varistor RC Network

Surge Suppression for Inductive dc Load Devices

Output Device

Diode (A surge suppressor can also be used.)

Contact protection methods for inductive ac and dc output devices.

These surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load


device. This reduces arcing of the output contacts. (High transient
can cause arcing that occurs when switching off an inductive device.)
Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive ac load devices
include a varistor, an RC network, or an Allen-Bradley surge
suppressor. These components must be appropriately rated to
suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular
inductive device.

For inductive dc load devices, a diode is suitable. A 1N4004 diode


is acceptable for most applications.

We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as


possible to the load device.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–19

Mounting Your Control This section assists you in mounting your modular style unit. It
System consists of the dimensions of the four modular hardware styles and
link coupler. For more information, see the SLC 500 Modular
Chassis Installation Instructions, Publication Number 1746-5.8.

Mounting Modular Hardware Style Units

You can mount the modular hardware style units directly to the back
panel of your enclosure using the mounting tabs and M4 or M5 (#10
or #12) screws. The torque requirement is 3.4 N-m (30 in-lbs)
maximum.

Left-side View (all chassis)


0.1 cm
(0.04 in.)

17.1 cm 14.0 cm
(6.73 in.) (5.51 in.)

14.5 cm
(5.71 in.)

1746-A4
0.55 cm Dia.
1.1 cm Dia. (0.217 in.)
(0.433 in.) 7.0 cm
(2.76 in.)

➌➋ ➊

14.0 cm
15.8 cm (5.51 in.)
(6.22 in.)

17.1 cm
(6.73 in.)

4.5 cm
0.55 cm Dia. (1.77 in.)
(0.217 in.)
21.5 cm
(8.46 in.) 1.4 cm
23.5 cm (0.55 in.)
(9.25 in.)
26.1 cm
(10.28 in.)

➊ Dimensions with 1746P1 power supply.


➋ Dimensions with 1746P2 or 1746P3 power supply.
➌ Dimensions with 1746P4 power supply.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–20 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

1746-A7
0.55 cm Dia.
1.1 cm Dia.
17.5 cm (0.217 in.)
(0.433 in.)
(6.89 in.)

➌➋ ➊

17.1 cm
15.8 cm (6.73 in.)
(6.22 in.) 14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

.55 cm Dia. 4.5 cm


(0.217 in.) (1.77 in.)
32.0 cm 1.4 cm
(12.60 in.) (0.55 in.)
34.0 cm
(13.39 in.)
36.6 cm
(14.41 in.)

1746-A10
0.55 cm Dia. 14.0 cm 5.5 cm
1.1 cm Dia.
(0.217 in.) (5.51 in.) (2.17 in.)
(0.433 in.)

➌➋ ➊

14.0 cm
15.8 cm
(5.51 in.)
(6.22 in.)

17.1 cm
(6.73 in.)

0.55 cm Dia. 14.0 cm


(0.217 in.) (5.51 in.)
43.5 cm 1.4 cm
(17.13 in.) (0.55 in.)
45.5 cm
(17.91 in.)
48.1 cm
(18.94 in.)

➊ Dimensions with 1746P1 power supply.


➋ Dimensions with 1746P2 or 1746P3 power supply.
➌ Dimensions with 1746P4 power supply.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–21

1746-A13
5.5 cm
1.1 cm Dia. 0.55 cm Dia. 14.0 cm (2.17 in.)
10.5 cm
(0.433 in.) (0.217 in.) (5.51 in.)
(4.13 in.)

➌➋ ➊
17.1 cm
(6.73 in.)
15.8 cm
(6.22 in.) 14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

0.55 cm Dia. 14.0 cm


(0.217 in.) (5.51 in.)
54.0 cm 1.4 cm
(21.26 in.) (0.55 in.)
56.0 cm
58.6 cm (22.05 in.)
(23.07 in.)

➊ Dimensions with 1746P1 power supply.


➋ Dimensions with 1746P2 or 1746P3 power supply.
➌ Dimensions with 1746P4 power supply.

Link Coupler (AIC)


R 2.74 146
(0.11) (5.75)
R 5.5
(0.22)

172
(6.75)
159
(6.24)
137
(5.41)

14
(0.55)

38 4.3
7.1
(1.50) 5.5 Dia. (0.17)
(0.28)
(0.216)
Front View millimeters Right Side View
(inches)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–22 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Installing Your I/O Modules This section describes the features of an I/O module, defines sinking
and sourcing, and provides installation instructions for an I/O
module.

Features of an SLC 500 I/O Module

Below is an example of a combination I/O module.

OUTPUT INPUT
I/O Status Indicators
0 4 0 4
1 5 1 5
Color Band 2 2
3 3
Terminal Block Screw
HSCE

Input and Output Terminals VAC–VDC


Connected to Terminal Block OUT 0

OUT 1
Hinged Terminal Door
OUT 2
with Wiring Label
OUT 3
Terminal Block (May be OUT 4
colorcoded and removable OUT 5
on some modules.) NOT
USED
NOT
USED
IN 0

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

IN 5
NOT

Terminal Block Screw


USED
NOT
USED
AC COM

Wire Tie Slots

Wires Leading to Output


and Input Devices

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–23

Definition of Sinking and Sourcing

Sinking and sourcing are terms used to describe a current signal flow
relationship between field input and output devices in a control
system and their power supply.
• Field devices connected to the positive side (+V) of the field
power supply are sourcing field devices.
• Field devices connected to the negative side (dc Common) of the
field power supply are called sinking field devices.
To maintain electrical compatibility between field devices and the
programmable controller system, this definition is extended to the
input/output circuits on the discrete I/O modules.
• Sourcing I/O circuits supply (source) current to sinking field
devices.
• Sinking I/O circuits receive (sink) current from sourcing field
devices.
Europe: The dc sinking input and sourcing output module circuits
are the commonly used options.

Contact Output Circuits – ac or dc


Relays can be used for either ac or dc output circuits and
accommodate either sinking or sourcing field devices. These
capabilities are a result of the output switch being a mechanical
contact closure, not sensitive to current flow direction and capable of
accommodating a broad range of voltages.

This high degree of application flexibility makes contact output


modules very popular and useful in control environments with a
broad mix of electrical I/O circuit requirements.

Solid State dc I/O Circuits


The design of dc field devices typically requires that they be used in
a specific sinking or sourcing circuit depending on the internal
circuitry of the device. The dc input and output field circuits are
commonly used with field devices that have some form of internal
solid state circuitry that need a dc signal voltage to function.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–24 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Sourcing Device with Sinking Input Module Circuit


The field device is on the positive side of the power supply between
the supply and the input terminal. When the field device is activated,
it sources current to the input circuit.

I
FIELD DEVICE
Input
+
DC
DC POWER INPUT
SUPPLY CIRCUIT
_

DC Com

Sinking Device with Sourcing Input Module Circuit


The field device is on the negative side of the power supply between
the supply and the input terminal. When the field device is activated,
it sinks current from the input circuit.

I
FIELD DEVICE
Input
_
DC
DC POWER INPUT
SUPPLY CIRCUIT
+

VDC

Sinking Device with Sourcing Output Module Circuit


The field device is on the negative side of the power supply between
the supply and the output terminal. When the output is activated, it
sources current to the field device.

VDC
+ I
FIELD DEVICE
DC POWER Out
DC
SUPPLY OUTPUT
_ CIRCUIT

DC Com

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–25

Sourcing Device with Sinking Output Module Circuit


The field device is on the positive side of the power supply between
the supply and the output terminal. When the output is activated, it
sinks current from the field device.

VDC

+ I
FIELD DEVICE Out
DC POWER
SUPPLY DC
_ OUTPUT
CIRCUIT

DC Com

Inserting I/O Modules

The procedure for installing I/O modules is similar to the procedure


for installing the 1747-ASB module. Follow the steps below.

ATTENTION: Disconnect power before attempting


to install, remove, or wire modules.
!
1. Disconnect power.
2. Align circuit board of the module with the chassis card guide.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–26 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

3. Slide the module into the chassis until the top and bottom tabs
lock into place.
4. Insert the wire tie in the slots.
5. Route the wires down and away from the module, securing them
with the wire tie.
OUTPUT INPUT

0 4 0 4
1 5 1 5
2 2
3 3

Wire Tie

Wires Leading to Output


and Input Devices

6. Cover all unused slots with the Card Slot Filler, Catalog Number
1746-N2, to keep the chassis free from dust and debris.

Removing I/O Modules

ATTENTION: Disconnect power before attempting


to install, remove, or wire modules.
!
1. Disconnect power.
2. Press and hold the module release located on each self-locking
tab and slide the module out of the chassis slot.
3. Cover all unused slots with the Card Slot Filler, Catalog Number
1746-N2, to keep the chassis free from dust and debris.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–27

Wiring the I/O Modules The following are general recommendations for wiring I/O devices.

ATTENTION: Before you install and wire I/O


devices, disconnect power from the controller and any
! other source to the I/O devices.

Use acceptable wire gauge — The I/O wiring terminals are


designed to accept two wires per terminal (maximum) of the
following size wire:
• Europe: 2mm2 cross section or smaller
• United States: 14 AWG or smaller stranded wires
Label wires — Label wiring to I/O devices, power sources, and
ground. Use tape, shrink-tubing, or other dependable means for
labeling purposes. In addition to labeling, use colored insulation to
identify wiring based on signal characteristics. For example, you
may use blue for dc I/O wiring and red for ac I/O wiring.

Secure wires — Route the wires down and away from the module,
securing them with the cable tie.

Bundle wires — Bundle wiring for each similar I/O device together.
If you use ducts, allow at least 5 cm (2 in.) between the ducts and the
controller so there is sufficient room to wire the devices.

Identify terminals — Terminal cover plates have a write-on area for


each terminal. Use this area to identify your I/O devices. Label the
removable terminal block if you have not already.

ATTENTION: Calculate the maximum possible


current in each power and common wire. Observe all
! local electrical codes dictating the maximum current
allowable for each wire size. Current above the
maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat, which
can cause damage.
Capacitors on input modules have a stored charge that
can cause a non-lethal shock. Avoid mounting the
controller in a position where installation or service
personnel would be in danger from startle reaction.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–28 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Using Removable Terminal Blocks

The Removable Terminal Block (RTB) is provided on all 12-point


and 16-point discrete I/O modules and analog modules. They allow
for faster and more convenient wiring of the I/O modules. The RTBs
and modules are color-coded as follows:

If the color is: Then the RTB is for:


red ac inputs/outputs
blue dc inputs/outputs
orange relay outputs
green specialty modules
black These I/O wiring terminal blocks are not removable.

Replacement terminal blocks are available if they are lost or


damaged.

Removing the RTB


Below are guidelines for removing the RTB.

ATTENTION: Disconnect power before attempting


to install or remove I/O modules or their terminal
! blocks.

1. If the I/O module is already installed in the chassis, disconnect


power.
2. Unscrew the upper right and lower left terminal block release
screws.
3. Grasp the RTB with your thumb and forefinger and pull straight
out.
4. Write the appropriate slot, chassis, and module type on the RTB
label.

Terminal Block Terminal Block


Release Screw Release Screw

SLOT______RACK______
• MODULE______
Dot indicates terminal
number 0 (or top of I/O wiring).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–29

Installing the RTB


Below are guidelines for installing the RTB.

1. Be sure the color of the RTB matches the color band on the
module.

ATTENTION: Inserting a wired RTB on an incorrect


module can damage the module circuitry when power
! is applied.

2. Write the appropriate slot, chassis, and module type on the RTB
label.

ATTENTION: Disconnect power before attempting


to install or remove I/O modules or their terminal
! blocks.

3. Disconnect power.
4. Align the terminal block release screws with the mating
connector in the module.
5. Press the RTB firmly onto the connector contacts.
6. Tighten the terminal block release screws. To avoid cracking the
terminal block, alternate the tightening of the screws.

Terminal Block Release Screws


Maximum Torque=0.7-0.9
NewtonMeters (6-8 in./lbs.)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–30 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Calculating Heat The following terms are used throughout this section. Familiarize
Dissipation for Your yourself with them before proceeding further into the section.
Control System
Watts per point — maximum heat dissipation that can occur in each
field wiring point when energized.

Minimum watts — amount of heat dissipation that can occur when


there is no field power present.

Maximum watts — maximum amount of heat that the module


generates with field power present.

Module Heat Dissipation: Calculated Watts vs. Maximum Watts

There are two ways that you can calculate heat dissipation.

Calculated Watts — if you want to determine the amount of heat


generated by the points energized on your module, use the formula
below for calculating the heat dissipation of each module. Then use
these values for calculating the power supply loading for each
chassis — this is done using the worksheet.

(number of points energized x watts per point) + minimum watts =


heat dissipation of module
Maximum watts — maximum amount of heat that the module
generates with field power present. Use maximum watts especially
if you are not sure how many points on a module will be energized at
any time.

Once you have determined which way you will calculate the heat
dissipation of your modules, see the Example Worksheet for
Calculating Heat Dissipation on page B–35. This worksheet shows
you how to calculate the heat dissipation for the example 1747-ASB
system on page B–34. Once you feel comfortable with the layout of
the worksheet, go to the worksheet on page B–36 and fill it out for
your control system.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–31

Calculating the Power Supply Loading

Use the table below to calculate the power supply loading for each
chassis that you have (step 1 of the worksheet).

Hardware Catalog Minimum Maximum


Watts per Point
Component Numbers Watts Watts
1746IA4 0.270 0.175 1.300
1746IA8 0.270 0.250 2.400
1746IA16 0.270 0.425 4.800
1746IB8 0.200 0.250 1.900
1746IB16 0.200 0.425 3.600
1746IB32 0.200 0.530 6.900
1746IC16 0.220 0.425 3.950
1746IG16 0.020 0.700 1.000
Input 1746IH16 consult factory
Modules 1746IM4 0.350 0.175 1.600
1746IM8 0.350 0.250 3.100
1746IM16 0.350 0.425 6.000
1746IN16 0.350 0.425 6.000
1746ITB16 0.200 0.425 3.600
1746ITV16 0.200 0.425 3.600
1746IV8 0.200 0.250 1.900
1746IV16 0.200 0.425 3.600
1746IV32 0.200 0.530 6.900
1746OA8 1.000 0.925 9.000
1746OA16 0.462 1.850 9.300
1746OAP12 1.000 1.850 10.850
1746OB8 0.775 0.675 6.900
1746OB16 0.338 1.400 7.600
1746OB32 0.078 2.260 4.800
1746OBP8 0.300 0.675 3.080
1746OBP16 0.310 1.250 6.260
Output
O tp t
1746OG16 0.033 0.900 1.500
Modules
1746OV8 0.775 0.675 6.900
1746OV16 0.388 1.400 7.600
1746OV32 0.078 2.260 4.800
1746OVP16 0.310 1.250 6.260
1746OW4 0.133 1.310 1.900
1746OW8 0.138 2.590 3.700
1746OW16 0.033 5.170 5.700
1746OX8 0.825 2.590 8.600

Continued on the next page.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–32 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Hardware Catalog Minimum Maximum


Watts per Point
Component Numbers Watts Watts
0.270 per input pt.
1746IO4 0.750 1.600
0.133 per output pt.
Input &
0.270 per input pt.
Output 1746IO8 1.380 3.000
0.133 per output pt.
Modules
0.270 per input pt.
1746IO12 2.130 4.600
0.133 per output pt.
1746BAS NA 3.750 3.800
1746FIO4I NA 3.760 3.800
1746FIO4V NA 3.040 3.100
1746HS NA consult factory
1746HSTP1 NA consult factory
1746NI4 NA 2.170 2.200
Specialty
Specialt
1746NIO4I NA 3.760 3.800
Modules
1746NIO4V NA 3.040 3.100
1746NO4I NA 4.960 5.000
1746NO4V NA 3.780 3.800
1746NR4 NA consult factory
1746NT4 NA consult factory
1747KE NA 3.750 3.800
Adapter
1747ASB NA 1.875 1.875
Modules

NA (Not Applicable)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–33

Determining the Power Supply Dissipation

Use the graphs below for determining the power supply dissipation
in step 2 of the worksheet.

1746P1 Power Supply Change in Power Dissipation due to 1746P2 Power Supply Change in Power Dissipation
Output Loading due to Output Loading
18
20
Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)

Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)


16 18
14 16

12 14
12
10
10
8
8
6
6
4 4
2 2

0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Power Supply Loading (Watts) Power Supply Loading (Watts)

1746P3 Power Supply Change in Power 1746P4 Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading Dissipation due to Output Loading

25 25
Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)
Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)

20 20

15 15

10 10

5 5

0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Power Supply Loading (Watts) Power Supply Loading (Watts)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–34 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Example Heat Dissipation Calculation

If your controller consisted of the following hardware components,


you would calculate heat dissipation as shown in the worksheet on
page B–35.

DTAM Chassis 1 Chassis 2

Peripheral Device

Slot 0 1 2 3 Slot 4 5 6 7
User Power
To Peripheral

The following table details the total watts dissipated by the modules
and peripheral devices in the above SLC 500 controller.

Chassis 1 Chassis 2
Slot Number Catalog Number Min. Watts Max. Watts Slot Number Catalog Number Min. Watts Max. Watts
0 1747L511 1.75 1.75 4 1746IA16 .425 4.8
1 1746BAS 3.75 3.8 5 1746IA16 .425 4.8
2 1746IA8 .250 2.4 6 1746OW16 5.17 5.5➀
3 1746OV8 .675 6.9 7 1746OW16 5.17 5.7
Peripheral
1747DTAM 2.5 2.5 NA NA NA NA
Device
User Power to
NA NA NA NA NA 2.4➁ NA
Peripheral

➀ This output card uses 5.5 watts because only 10 points are on at any one time. Using the
calculated watts formula (number of points energized x watts per point) + minimum watts =
heat dissipation of module the calculated watts for the 1746OW16 module is 5.5W: (10 points
X .033) + 5.17 = 5.5W.
➁ The user power on the 1746P1 power supply for Chassis 2 is being used to power a peripheral
(100 mA at 24V dc).
NA (Not Applicable)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System B–35

Example - Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation


Procedure: Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3 Heat
Dissipation
1. Calculate the heat dissipation for each chassis without the power supply.
A. Write in the watts (calculated watts or maximum watts, see page B-30) dissipated
by the adapter, I/O and specialty modules, and any peripheral devices attached to the
adapter. Then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3
Cat. No. Ht. Dis. Cat. No. Ht. Dis. Cat. No. Ht. Dis.
_________|_________
L511 1.750 _________|_________
IA16 4.800 _________|_________
_________|_________
BAS 3.800 _________|_________
IA16 4.800 _________|_________
_________|_________
IA8 2.400 _________|_________
OW16 5.500 _________|_________
_________|_________
OV8 6.900 _________|_________
OW16 5.700 _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
Total: 17.350
_______ 20.800
_______ _______
17.350
__________ 20.800
_________ _________
B. Place the heat dissipation for each chassis into the appropriate columns.
2. Calculate the heat dissipation for each power supply.
A. Calculate the power supply loading for each chassis: write in the minimum watts for
each device (see page B-31) and then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Important: If you have a device connected to user power, multiply 24V by the current
used. Include user power in the total power supply loading.
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3
Cat. No. Min. Ht. Dis. Cat. No. Min. Ht. Dis. Cat. No. Min. Ht. Dis.
_________|_________
L511 1.750 _________|_________
IA16 0.425 _________|_________
_________|_________
BAS 3.750 _________|_________
IA16 0.425 _________|_________
_________|_________
IA8 0.250 _________|_________
OW16 5.170 _________|_________
_________|_________
OV8 0.675 _________|_________
OW16 5.170 _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
user power _________|_________ _________|_________
2.400 _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________
DTAM 2.500 _________|_________ _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
Total: 8.925
_______ 13.590
_______ _______

B. Use the power supply loading for each chassis and the graphs on page B-33 to 13.000
_________ 15.000
_________ _________
determine the ppower supply
pp y dissipation.
p Place the ppower supply
pp y dissipations
p into the
appropriate columns.
columns

3. Add the chassis dissipation to the power supply dissipation.


30.350 +
________ 35.800 +
________ ________ = 66.150 W➀
_______
4. Add across the columns for the total heat dissipation of the adapter.
➀ United States: To convert to BTUs/hr., multiply the total heat dissipation by 3.414.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


B–36 Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation


Make copies of this worksheet as needed.

Procedure: Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3 Heat


Dissipation
1. Calculate the heat dissipation for each chassis without the power supply.
A. Write in the watts (calculated watts or maximum watts, see page B-30) dissipated
by the adapter, I/O and specialty modules, and any peripheral devices attached to the
adapter. Then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3
Cat. No. Ht. Dis. Cat. No. Ht. Dis. Cat. No. Ht. Dis.
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
Total: _______ _______ _______
__________ _________ _________
B. Place the heat dissipation for each chassis into the appropriate columns.
2. Calculate the heat dissipation for each power supply.
A. Calculate the power supply loading for each chassis: write in the minimum watts for
each device (see page B-31) and then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Important: If you have a device connected to user power, multiply 24V by the current
used. Include user power in the total power supply loading.
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3
Cat. No. Min. Ht. Dis. Cat. No. Min. Ht. Dis. Cat. No. Min. Ht. Dis.
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
_________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
user power _________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________ _________|_________ _________|_________
Total: _______ _______ _______

B. Use the power supply loading for each chassis and the graphs on page B-33 to _________ _________ _________
determine the ppower supply
pp y dissipation.
p Place the ppower supply
pp y dissipations
p into the
appropriate columns.
columns

3. Add the chassis dissipation to the power supply dissipation.


________ + ________ + ________ = _______ W

4. Add across the columns for the total heat dissipation of the adapter.
➀ United States: To convert to BTUs/hr., multiply the total heat dissipation by 3.414.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Appendix C
Differences Between the
1747ASB Module and the
1771ASB Series C Module

This appendix examines the differences between Catalog Number


1747-ASB and Catalog Number 1771-ASB Series C, Revision E or
later. These differences are:
• image size selection
• hold last state operation
• specialty I/O module mapping and control
• remote expansion chassis
• starting logical group number selection
• inserting and removing I/O modules under power
• DIP switch locations
• I/O module keying
• physical slot numbering
• status indication
• throughput performance
• inhibit functionality
Page and chapter references are provided within each heading so you
can quickly review the information specific to Catalog Number
1747-ASB.

Image Size Selection The 1771-ASB image size is automatically selected based on the
(page 4-9) chassis size and addressing mode. The automatic assignment is
possible because the number of 1771 chassis physical slots are
provided in 2-group multiples. Therefore, there are no unused
physical I/O slots or scanner image that is not utilized.

The 1747-ASB image size must be selected with DIP switches


(SW2-5,6,7,8). The selection is necessary because the 1746 chassis
are not provided in 2-group multiples. In some cases, you must
make a choice between not using a slot or not using scanner image.
For more information on odd size chassis and image conditions, refer
to page 4–13.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


C–2 Differences Between the 1747-ASB Module and the 1771-ASB Series C Module

Hold Last State Operation When the hold last state mode is selected, the 1771-ASB module
(page 4-15) holds discrete outputs in their last state if:
• an error occurs
• RIO communications are lost
• the 1771-ASB module is inhibited
• the 1771-ASB module receives reset, adapter decide commands
from the scanner
When the hold last state mode is selected the 1747-ASB module
holds discrete outputs in their last state if:
• RIO communications are lost
• the 1747-ASB module is inhibited
• the 1771-ASB module receives reset, adapter decide commands
from the scanner
The 1747-ASB module always clears discrete outputs if:
• an I/O module fault occurs
• a 1747-ASB error occurs
• a remote expansion chassis loses power

ATTENTION: When the discrete outputs are being


held in their last state by the 1747-ASB module, the
! following information concerning the specialty
modules must be considered:
The specialty I/O modules operate as if they are being
controlled by an SLC processor in the run mode. Refer
to the specialty I/O module’s user manual to determine
the response to this condition.
The specialty I/O modules inputs are read by the ASB
module. However, the specialty I/O module’s outputs
are not modified by the ASB module.

Remote Expansion Chassis The 1771-ASB module does not support expansion chassis. It allows
(page 3-1) up to 16 physical slots in one 1771 chassis.

The 1747-ASB module can control up to three chassis; a remote


chassis and two remote expansion chassis. If power to any remote
expansion chassis is lost, a 1747-ASB error occurs and all discrete
outputs are cleared, regardless of the hold last state switch setting.
When power to the remote expansion chassis is restored, the ASB
module automatically resumes operation as if the ASB module’s
power was cycled.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Differences Between the 1747-ASB Module and the 1771-ASB Series C Module C–3

Inserting and Removing I/O ATTENTION: Disconnect power to the 1771- or


Modules Under Power 1747-ASB chassis before attempting to insert, remove,
(page 6-9) ! or wire any I/O modules.

In most cases, inserting or removing I/O modules while under power


does not cause a 1771-ASB error.

Whenever the 1747-ASB module is not faulted, inserting or


removing I/O modules under power does cause a 1747-ASB error.

Starting Logical Group In the RIO link system, only even numbered logical group numbers
Number Selection (0, 2, 4, or 6) are valid.
(page 4-4)
The 1771-ASB module limits the allowable starting logical group
numbers based on the selected addressing mode and chassis size.

The 1747-ASB module allows virtually any group number to be


selected. The exception is when 1/2-slot addressing and discrete
mode is selected. Then, only logical groups 0 and 4 can be used.

Specialty I/O Module Image The 1771-ASB module maps all discrete I/O modules using discrete
Mapping and Control transfers; data is exchanged with the scanner using RIO discrete
(page 3-13) transfers on the RIO link. All specialty (Intelligent)➀ I/O modules
are block transfer mapped, data is exchanged with the scanner using
RIO block transfers.
➀ An Intelligent I/O module is a 1771 nondiscrete I/O module.

The 1747-ASB module handles discrete modules the same way the
1771-ASB module does by using RIO discrete transfers.

Important: If you are only using discrete modules, the 1771-ASB


and 1747-ASB modules mapping and control are
identical.
If the 1747-ASB module is configured for the block transfer mode, it
handles all specialty I/O modules in the same manner as the
1771-ASB module does by using RIO block transfers.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


C–4 Differences Between the 1747-ASB Module and the 1771-ASB Series C Module

Important: PLC processor control of 1771 and 1747 specialty I/O


modules on the RIO link is the same if the 1747-ASB
module is configured for RIO block transfer. However,
the I/O modules themselves are not controlled in the
same way.
For example, if a 1771-IFE analog input module is used
with the 1771-ASB module, RIO block transfers are
used to transfer the 1771-IFE image data between the
scanner and 1771-ASB module. In addition, the
1771-IFE module also receives configuration
information from the scanner using RIO block transfers.
If a 1746-NI4 analog input module is used with the
1747-ASB module, a RIO block transfer is used to
transfer 1747-NI4 image data between the scanner and
the 1747-ASB module. However the 1746-NI4 module
requires no configuration information from the scanner.
In addition , the 1771-IFE image layout is not the same
as the 1746-NI4 image layout. For example, the
1771-IFE image contains some alarm values and has
words for the module’s eight inputs. The 1746-NI4
image only has words for the module’s four inputs.
If the 1747-ASB module is configured for the discrete mode, it
attempts to map all specialty I/O modules discretely. For more
information on how discrete I/O modules are mapped, refer to
page 3–13.

DIP Switch Locations The 1771-ASB module has two DIP switches and uses one DIP
(chapter 4) switch on the 1771 chassis.

The 1747-ASB module has three DIP switches.

I/O Module Keying The 1771-ASB module uses the chassis hardware keying bands to
(page 4-21) ensure the proper I/O modules are installed in the correct slot.

The 1747-ASB module uses a DIP switch setting and software to


ensure that the proper I/O modules are installed in the correct slots.

Physical Slot Numbering The 1771-ASB module resides in an unnumbered slot. The first
(page 3-2) physical slot available to an I/O module is slot 0. The subsequent
physical slots are numbered decimally, up to a maximum of 15.

The 1747-ASB module resides in slot 0. The first physical slot


available to an I/O module is slot 1. The subsequent physical slots
are numbered decimally, up to a maximum of 30.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Differences Between the 1747-ASB Module and the 1771-ASB Series C Module C–5

Status Indication The 1771-ASB module has three LEDs that indicate module and
(page 7-1) system status.

The 1747-ASB module has two LEDs and three 7-segment status
display that indicate module and system status. The 7-segment
status displays provide more detailed operating status and error
indication than what can be provided with LEDs.

Throughput In most cases the 1747-ASB throughput times are slower than the
(page A-2) 1771-ASB throughput times. Refer to appendix A for the 1747-ASB
throughput time information.

Inhibit Functionality If some, but not all, of the 1771-ASB Series C, Revision E logical
(page 6-3) devices are inhibited, the 1771-ASB module continues to:
• communicate on the RIO link
• control outputs in its chassis
If some, but not all, of the 1747-ASB logical devices are inhibited,
the 1747-ASB module:
• continues to communicate on the RIO link if processor restart
lockout is not selected, or stops communicating on the RIO link if
processor restart lockout is selected
• stops controlling outputs in it’s chassis regardless of the processor
restart lockout selection. Outputs are held in last state if hold last
state is selected or they are reset if hold last state is not selected.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Appendix D
DIP Switch and Address
Configuration Worksheets

This appendix provides worksheets for you to configure your DIP


switches and to address your I/O modules.

DIP Switch Configuration Use this worksheet to record the DIP switch settings for each of your
module.

Self Locking Tab


DIP Switches

SW3

SW2

SW1

SERIAL NO.

CAT
1747ASB Module

N
O

N
O

N
O

SLC 500
REMOTE I/O ADAPTER MODULE
1

1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FRN

SER
 UL
CLASS 1, GROUPS A, B, C AND D, DIV. 2

LISTED IND. CONT. EQ.


FOR HAZ. LOC. A196

CURRENT REQUIREMENT: 375mA


INSTALL IN SLOT ZERO OF MODULAR CHASSIS ONLY
IMPORTANT:
SA 
OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
CODE T3C
FAC 1M
MADE IN USA
Î

SW3 SW2 SW1


N
O

N
O

N
O

Hold Last State Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Processor Restart Lockout Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Link Response Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup Reserved Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 2 Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode ASB Module Image Size Bit 1 Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
I/O Module Keying ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

ON
OFF

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


D–2 DIP Switch and Address Configuration Worksheets

SW3 SW2 SW1

N
O

N
O

N
O
Hold Last State Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Processor Restart Lockout Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Module _ Link Response Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup Reserved Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 2 Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode ASB Module Image Size Bit 1 Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
I/O Module Keying ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

SW3 SW2 SW1


N
O

N
O

N
O
Hold Last State Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Processor Restart Lockout Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Module _ Link Response Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup Reserved Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 2 Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode ASB Module Image Size Bit 1 Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
I/O Module Keying ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

SW3 SW2 SW1


N
O

N
O

N
O
Hold Last State Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Processor Restart Lockout Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Module _ Link Response Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup Reserved Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 2 Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode ASB Module Image Size Bit 1 Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
I/O Module Keying ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

SW3 SW2 SW1


N
O

N
O

N
O

Hold Last State Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Processor Restart Lockout Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Module _ Link Response Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup Reserved Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB) Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB) ASB Module Image Size Bit 2 Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode ASB Module Image Size Bit 1 Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
I/O Module Keying ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB) Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


DIP Switch and Address Configuration Worksheets D–3

Address Configuration Use this worksheet to address the I/O modules residing in the
1747-ASB module chassis.

SLC Processor Input Image SLC Processor Output Image


High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte
Bit Number − Decimal 15 8 7 0 Bit Number − Decimal 15 8 7 0

Group 0 I:e.0 Group 0 O:e.0


Group 1 I:e.1 Group 1 O:e.1
Group 2 I:e.2 Group 2 O:e.2
Logical Group 3 I:e.3 Logical Group 3 O:e.3
Rack 0 Rack 0
Group 4 I:e.4 Group 4 O:e.4
Group 5 I:e.5 Group 5 O:e.5
Group 6 I:e.6 Group 6 O:e.6
Group 7 I:e.7 Group 7 O:e.7
Group 0 I:e.8 Group 0 O:e.8
Group 1 I:e.9 Group 1 O:e.9
Group 2 I:e.10 Group 2 O:e.10
Logical Logical
Group 3 I:e.11 Group 3 O:e.11
Rack 1 Rack 1
Group 4 I:e.12 Group 4 O:e.12
Group 5 I:e.13 Group 5 O:e.13
Group 6 I:e.14 Group 6 O:e.14

ÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 7
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ I:e.15
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 7
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ O:e.15

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 0 I:e.16 Group 0 O:e.16
Group 1 I:e.17 Group 1 O:e.17

Logical
Rack 2 ÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
ÉÉÉÉÉ I:e.18
I:e.19
I:e.20
Logical
Rack 2 ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
ÉÉÉÉÉ O:e.18
O:e.19
O:e.20
Group 5 I:e.21 Group 5 O:e.21
Group 6 I:e.22 Group 6 O:e.22
Group 7 I:e.23 Group 7 O:e.23
Group 0 I:e.24 Group 0 O:e.24
Group 1 I:e.25 Group 1 O:e.25
Group 2 I:e.26 Group 2 O:e.26
Logical Logical
Group 3 I:e.27 Rack 3 Group 3 O:e.27
Rack 3
Group 4 I:e.28 Group 4 O:e.28
Group 5 I:e.29 Group 5 O:e.29
Group 6 I:e.30 Group 6 O:e.30
Group 7 I:e.31 Group 7 O:e.31

e = 1747SN Slot Number

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


D–4 DIP Switch and Address Configuration Worksheets

SLC Processor Input Image SLC Processor Output Image


High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte
Bit Number − Decimal 15 8 7 0 Bit Number − Decimal 15 8 7 0

Group 0 I:e.0 Group 0 O:e.0


Group 1 I:e.1 Group 1 O:e.1
Group 2 I:e.2 Group 2 O:e.2
Logical Group 3 I:e.3 Logical Group 3 O:e.3
Rack 0 Rack 0
Group 4 I:e.4 Group 4 O:e.4
Group 5 I:e.5 Group 5 O:e.5
Group 6 I:e.6 Group 6 O:e.6
Group 7 I:e.7 Group 7 O:e.7
Group 0 I:e.8 Group 0 O:e.8
Group 1 I:e.9 Group 1 O:e.9
Group 2 I:e.10 Group 2 O:e.10
Logical Logical
Group 3 I:e.11 Group 3 O:e.11
Rack 1 Rack 1
Group 4 I:e.12 Group 4 O:e.12
Group 5 I:e.13 Group 5 O:e.13

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 6 I:e.14 Group 6 O:e.14

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Group 7 I:e.15 Group 7 O:e.15
Group 0 I:e.16 Group 0 O:e.16

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 1 I:e.17 Group 1 O:e.17

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Group 2 I:e.18 Group 2 O:e.18
Logical Logical Group 3
Group 3 I:e.19 O:e.19
Rack 2 Rack 2
Group 4 I:e.20 Group 4 O:e.20
Group 5 I:e.21 Group 5 O:e.21
Group 6 I:e.22 Group 6 O:e.22
Group 7 I:e.23 Group 7 O:e.23
Group 0 I:e.24 Group 0 O:e.24
Group 1 I:e.25 Group 1 O:e.25
Group 2 I:e.26 Group 2 O:e.26
Logical Logical
Group 3 I:e.27 Rack 3 Group 3 O:e.27
Rack 3
Group 4 I:e.28 Group 4 O:e.28
Group 5 I:e.29 Group 5 O:e.29
Group 6 I:e.30 Group 6 O:e.30
Group 7 I:e.31 Group 7 O:e.31

e = 1747SN Slot Number

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Index

Numbers Allen-Bradley, P-6, 7-1


contacting for assistance, P-6, 7-1
1-slot addressing, 3-7
considerations, 3-8 ambient operating temperature rating, for
power supplies, B-2
examples, 3-10
application example program, 8-6
1/2-slot addressing, 3-10
basic SLC, 8-6
considerations, 3-11
PLC, 8-24
examples, 3-12
SLC, 8-15
1746-C7 cable, B-7
application examples, 8-1
1746-C9 cable, B-7 basic SLC, 8-1
1746-P1 power supply, B-2 PLC, 8-16
1746-P2 power supply, B-2 SLC, 8-7
1746-P3 power supply, B-2 ASB module backplane scan time,
throughput, A-6
1746-P4 power supply, B-2
ASB module features, 1-12
1771-ASB series c, C-1 hardware, 1-13
2-slot addressing, 3-4 cable tie slots, 1-15
considerations, 3-5 DIP switches, 1-13
examples, 3-6 door label, 1-15
24V dc user power output current, B-2 manufacturing test plug, 1-15
RIO link and processor restart lockout,
24V dc user power output voltage, B-2 1-14
self-locking tabs, 1-15
status display and LEDs, 1-13
A
ASB module image size, 4-10
adapter, 1-4 special image and chassis size
extended node capability, 1-9 considerations, 4-13
interaction with scanners, 1-2 ASB module installation, 5-1
on RIO link as slave device, 1-2
ASB module overview, 1-1
adapter image, 1-4
in relation to logical devices, 1-6
size of, 1-5 B
addressing I/O modules, 3-3
base backplane scan time, throughput,
1-slot addressing, 3-7
A-6
considerations, 3-8
examples, 3-10 basic SLC application example, 8-1
1/2-slot addressing, 3-10 application example program, 8-6
considerations, 3-11 ASB module I/O mapping details, 8-5
examples, 3-12 module configuration details, 8-4
2-slot addressing, 3-4 processor image, 8-3
considerations, 3-5 RIO address label example, 8-5
examples, 3-6 RIO device configuration, 8-2
configuration worksheet, D-3 baud rate, 1-13
overview, 3-3 ASB module feature, 1-12
addressing labels, attaching to the I/O DIP switch setting, 4-4
modules, 2-5, 5-6 error operating code, 7-3
link termination, 5-4
addressing mode, 4-20
link wiring, 5-2
in basic SLC example, 8-2, 8-5
PLC example, 8-17
in PLC example, 8-17, 8-18, 8-21,
SLC basic example, 8-2
8-22
SLC example, 8-8
in SLC example, 8-8, 8-12, 8-13
I–2 Index

specifications, A-1 hold last state, C-2


block transfer, 1-7 I/O module keying, C-4
throughput, A-11 image size selection, C-1
transferring data, 1-7 inhibit functionality, C-5
inserting and removing I/O modules
block transfer mode, 3-14 under power, C-3
physical slot numbering, C-4
remote expansion chassis, C-2
C specialty I/O module image mapping and
cable distances, 5-2 control, C-3
maximum, 5-2 starting logical group number selection,
C-3
cable tie slots, 1-15
status indication, C-5
calculating heat dissipation for the SLC 500 throughput, C-5
control system, B-30
diode, 1N4004, B-18
calculated watts, B-30
maximum watts, B-30 DIP switch, 4-1
power supply dissipation graphs, B-33 configuration of mismatch fault codes,
power supply loading table, B-31 7-5
configuration worksheet, D-1
chassis overview, 3-1, 4-13
error operating codes for error conditions,
odd sizes, 4-13 7-3
remote chassis, 3-2 summary of switch settings, 4-22
remote expansion chassis, 3-2 SW 1, 4-2
types available, 3-1 configuration, 4-2
chassis slot, card guides, 2-4, 5-2 SW 2, 4-4
check mode, 6-2 configuration, 4-4, 4-6
SW 3, 4-15
Class1, Division 2, 5-5
configuration, 4-15
momentary switch, 5-5
DIP switch configuration mismatch fault
common power source, B-13 codes, 7-5
input states on power down, B-14
loss of power source, B-14 discrete I/O modules, 3-13
other types of line conditions, B-14 mapping, 3-13
overview of, 3-13
compatible modules, 1-12
discrete I/O throughput with block transfers
compatible RIO adapters, 1-11 present example, A-10
compatible RIO scanners, 1-10 discrete I/O throughput without block
complementary I/O, 4-5 transfers present example, A-7
in basic SLC application example, 8-2, discrete mode, 3-15
8-4
in PLC application example, 8-17, discrete transfer, 1-2
8-19, 8-20 transferring data, 1-7
in SLC application example, 8-8, door labels, 1-15
8-10, 8-11 applying octal labels, 2-5, 5-7
contacting Allen-Bradley for assistance,
P-6, 7-1
E
contactors (bulletin 100), surge suppressors
for, B-17 equipment needed, 2-1
contents of manual, P-2 error operating codes for error conditions,
7-3
errors, 7-1
D major, 7-1
definitions, P-3 minor, 7-1
differences between 1747-ASB and examples, 8-1
1771-ASB series c modules, C-1 basic SLC application, 8-1
DIP switch locations, C-4 PLC application, 8-16
Index I–3

SLC application, 8-7 I/O module insertion under power, 6-9


extended node capability, 1-9 I/O module keying, 4-21
link termination, 5-4 in basic SLC example, 8-2
of scanners and adapters, 1-9 in SLC example, 8-8
of the ASB module, 1-9 I/O module removal from a scanned slot,
specifications, A-1 6-9
I/O module removal from an unscanned
F slot, 6-10
I/O runtime fault codes, 7-7
fuse protection, power supply specification,
B-2 image mapping, 3-13
discrete, 3-13
specialty, 3-13
G inhibit, 6-3
getting started, procedures, 2-2 installing and wiring I/O modules, B-23
I/O module features, B-22
grounding guidelines, B-9
inserting I/O modules, B-25
removing I/O modules, B-26
H sinking, B-23
sourcing, B-23
hardware features, 1-13 using removable terminal blocks, B-28
cable tie slots, 1-15 wiring I/O devices, B-27
DIP switches, 1-13 installing the ASB module in an SLC
door label, 1-15 chassis, 5-1
manufacturing test plug, 1-15
RIO link and processor restart lockout internal current capacity, power supply
connector, 1-14 specification, B-2
self-locking tabs, 1-15 invalid RIO link transfers, 6-5
status displays and LEDs, 1-13
heat dissipation
example, B-34
L
worksheet, B-36 labels, addressing, attaching to the I/O
hold last state, 4-15 modules, 2-5, 5-6
in basic SLC example, 8-2, 8-4 labels, door, 1-15
in PLC example, 8-17, 8-19, 8-20 applying octal labels, 2-5, 5-7
in SLC example, 8-8, 8-10, 8-11 last chassis/PLC 3 backup, 4-19
start up and operation, 6-5 in basic SLC example, 8-2, 8-4
humidity rating, power supply specification, in PLC example, 8-17, 8-19, 8-20
B-2 in SLC example, 8-8, 8-10, 8-11
humidity specifications, A-1 line voltage, power supply specification,
B-2
link response time, 4-18
I in basic SLC example, 8-2
I/O devices, recommendations for wiring in PLC example, 8-17, 8-19, 8-20
terminals, identify, B-27 in SLC example, 8-8
wire gauge, use acceptable, B-27 link termination, 5-4
wires, bundle, B-27 resistor required for, 5-4
wires, label, B-27
link wiring, 5-2
wires, secure, B-27
correct link wiring, 5-2
I/O module addressing labels, 5-6 incorrect link wiring, 5-2
PLC as master, 5-6 link termination, 5-4
SLC as master, 5-6
logical device, 1-6
I/O module configuration mismatch fault adapters, 1-6
codes, 7-6
I–4 Index

assigning space, D-3 power conditioning considerations, B-15


logical group, 1-4 isolation, B-15
suppression, B-15
logical rack, 1-4
crossing logical rack boundaries, 1-5 power considerations, common power
significance of, 1-6 source, B-13
power supplies
calculating power supply loading, B-31
M determining power supply dissipation,
B-33
major error, 7-1 specifications
manuals, related, P-3 24V dc user power output current,
master device, 1-2 B-2
24V dc user power output voltage,
maximum inrush current, power supply B-2
specification, B-2 ambient operating temperature rating,
minor error, 7-1 B-2
module release, 2-4, 5-2 fuse protection, B-2
humidity rating, B-2
motor starters (bulletin 509), surge
internal current capacity, B-2
suppressors, B-17
line voltage, B-2
motor starters (bulletin 709), surge maximum inrush current, B-2
suppressors, B-17 storage temperature, B-2
mounting your SLC 500 control system, typical line power requirement, B-2
B-19 wiring, B-2
power supply loading specification, A-1
N power supply specifications, B-1
power up and initialization, 6-1
network specifications, A-1
check mode, 6-2
noise generators, B-16 save mode, 6-2
normal operation, 6-2 processor restart lockout, 4-17
exceptions, 6-3 in basic SLC example, 8-2, 8-4
status display codes, 7-2 in PLC example, 8-17, 8-19, 8-20
in SLC example, 8-8, 8-10, 8-11
not selecting, 6-4
O selecting, 6-4
octal labeling information, image bit switch wiring, 5-5
numbering, 1-5 publications, related, P-3
operation, 6-2
exceptions, 6-3
status display codes for normal operating R
conditions, 7-2 rack boundaries, crossing logical, 1-5
output contact protection, B-18 relays, surge suppressors for, B-17
remote chassis, 3-2
P slot numbering, 3-2
with I/O modules, 1-1
PLC application example, 8-16 with remote I/O, 1-2
application example program, 8-24 remote expansion chassis, 3-2
ASB module 1 configuration, 8-19 slot numbering, 3-2
ASB module 1 I/O mapping, 8-21 with I/O modules, 1-1
ASB module 2 configuration, 8-20 with remote I/O, 1-2
ASB module 2 I/O mapping, 8-22
PLC processor image, 8-18 remote expansion chassis power loss,
RIO address label examples, 8-23 6-5
RIO device configuration, 8-17 remote I/O overview, 1-2
Index I–5

removable terminal blocks (RTB) wiring layout, B-8


installing, B-29 SLC application example, 8-7
removing, B-28 application example program, 8-15
required tools and equipment, 2-1 ASB module 1 configuration, 8-10
reset, adapter decide, 6-3 ASB module 1 I/O mapping, 8-12
status display codes, 7-2 ASB module 2 configuration, 8-11
ASB module 2 I/O mapping, 8-13
reset, adapter reset, 6-3 processor image, 8-9
status display codes, 7-2 RIO address label examples, 8-14
RIO RIO device configuration, 8-8
compatible adapters, 1-11 slot numbering, 3-2
compatible scanners, 1-10 ASB module placement, 3-2
RIO adapters, 5-6 slot pairing, 8-12
RIO address label, 8-5 special considerations, B-16
basic SLC application example, 8-5 SLC 500 system installation
PLC application example, 8-23 excessive line voltage variations,
PLC example, 5-6 B-16
SLC application example, 8-14 excessive noise, B-16
SLC example, 5-6
specialty I/O mode, 4-20
RIO device configuration, 8-17 in PLC example, 8-17, 8-21
basic SLC application example, 8-2 in SLC basic example, 8-2
PLC application example, 8-17 in SLC example, 8-8, 8-12, 8-13
SLC application example, 8-8
specialty I/O modules, 3-14
RIO link, 1-2 mapping, 3-14
invalid link transfers, 6-5 block transfer mode, 3-14
physical and logical specifications, 1-9 discrete mode, 3-16
RIO scan time, throughput, A-5 overview, 3-13
specifications, A-1
network specifications, A-1
S power supplies
save mode, 6-2 24V dc user power output current,
B-2
scanner, 1-2
24V dc user power output voltage,
as master, 1-2 B-2
extended node capability, 1-9 ambient operating temperature rating,
image division, 1-4 B-2
logical groups, 1-4 fuse protection, B-2
logical racks, 1-4 humidity rating, B-2
interaction with adapters, 1-2 internal current capacity, B-2
overview, 1-2 line voltage, B-2
selecting a 1746 power supply, B-3 maximum inrush current, B-2
example, B-3 storage temperature, B-2
worksheet, B-5 typical line power requirement, B-2
slave device, 1-2 wiring, B-2
power supply loading, A-1
SLC 500 system installation, B-6
temperature and humidity, A-1
emergency-stop switches, B-12
throughput, A-1
grounding guidelines, B-9
master control relay, B-11 start up and operation, 6-1
output contact protection, B-18 status display codes, 7-2
power conditioning considerations, DIP switch configuration mismatch fault
B-15 codes, 7-5
preventing excessive heat, B-8 error operating codes for error conditions,
selecting an enclosure, B-6 7-3
spacing your enclosures, B-7 I/O module configuration mismatch fault
special considerations, B-16 codes, 7-6
I–6 Index

I/O runtime fault codes, 7-7 terms, P-3


status operating codes for normal testing the ASB module, 6-7
operating conditions, 7-2
throughput, A-2
status operating codes for normal operating calculating throughput, A-4
conditions, 7-2
block transfer, A-11
storage temperature, power supply with block transfers present, A-8,
specification, B-2 A-9
surge suppressors without block transfers present, A-4
for contactor, B-17 introduction, A-2
for motor starters, B-17 tools needed, 2-1
for relays, B-17
transferring data with RIO discrete and
SW 1, 4-2 block transfers, 1-7
DIP switch, 4-2 overview, 1-7
SW 2, 4-4 RIO discrete example, 1-7
DIP switch, 4-4 troubleshooting, 7-1
SW 3, 4-15 contacting Allen-Bradley, P-6, 7-1
DIP switch, 4-15 major error, 7-1
addressing mode, 4-20 minor error, 7-1
hold last state, 4-15 typical line power requirement, power
I/O module keying, 4-21 supply specification, B-2
last chassis/PLC 3 backup, 4-19
link response time, 4-18
power up and initialization, 6-1 W
processor restart lockout, 4-17
wiring, I/O modules, B-27
specialty I/O mode, 4-20
system startup, 6-1 wiring a processor restart lockout switch,
5-5
system start up, 6-1 status display code, 7-2
status display code, 7-3
wiring and grounding guidelines, B-9
wiring, power supply specification, B-2
T
temperature specifications, A-1
AllenBradley, a Rockwell Automation Business, has been helping its customers improve
productivity and quality for more than 90 years. We design, manufacture and support a broad
range of automation products worldwide. They include logic processors, power and motion
control devices, operator interfaces, sensors and a variety of software. Rockwell is one of the
world's leading technology companies.

Worldwide representation.
Argentina • Australia • Austria • Bahrain • Belgium • Brazil • Bulgaria • Canada • Chile • China, PRC • Colombia • Costa Rica • Croatia • Cyprus • Czech Republic •
Denmark • Ecuador • Egypt • El Salvador • Finland • France • Germany • Greece • Guatemala • Honduras • Hong Kong • Hungary • Iceland • India • Indonesia •
Ireland • Israel • Italy • Jamaica • Japan • Jordan • Korea • Kuwait • Lebanon • Malaysia • Mexico • Netherlands • New Zealand • Norway • Pakistan • Peru •
Philippines • Poland • Portugal • Puerto Rico • Qatar • Romania • Russia-CIS • Saudi Arabia • Singapore • Slovakia • Slovenia • South Africa, Republic • Spain •
Sweden • Switzerland • Taiwan • Thailand • Turkey • United Arab Emirates • United Kingdom • United States • Uruguay • Venezuela • Yugoslavia

AllenBradley Headquarters, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204 USA, Tel: (1) 414 3822000 Fax: (1) 414 3824444

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996 PN 4007202201(C)


Supersedes Publication 17476.13 - March 1996 Copyright 1996 AllenBradley Company, Inc. Printed in USA
Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

You might also like